Owner's Manual Contents for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine®
THE BMW 4 SERIES COUPE. OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
4 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 © 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates we recommend that you make sure that any and clarifications with respect to the printed such parts and/or accessories are appropri- BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and ate for use on your vehicle. clarifications will supersede the materials con- 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's dis- tained in that document. cussion of homologation, where it states 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser- that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for vice center,” “your service center,” “service your vehicle there,” the text should read specialist,” or “service” are used in the that you “may not be able to lodge warranty Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that claims for your vehicle there.” the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accesso- center or another service center or repair ries” section, in the sixth sentence, the shop that employs trained personnel that word “cannot” should read “does not.” can perform maintenance and repair work 6. At page 54, in the “Check and replace on your vehicle in accordance with BMW safety belts” section, the text beginning, specifications. “This should only be done by your service 2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con- center …” should be disregarded and the tains an affirmative instruction to contact a following text should be read in lieu thereof: “service center” or “your service center,” “BMW recommends having this work per- we wanted to clarify that BMW recom- formed by a service center as it is important mends that, if you are faced with one of the that this safety feature functions properly.” situations addressed by that text, you con- 7. At page 90, under the heading: “Special tact or seek the assistance of a BMW windshield,” the paragraph beginning, dealer's service center or another service “Therefore, have the special windshield …” center or repair shop that employs trained should be disregarded and the following personnel that can perform maintenance text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW and repair work on your vehicle in accor- recommends that you have the special dance with BMW specifications. windshield replaced by the service center.” While BMW of North America LLC, at no 8. At page 167 under the heading: “Objects cost to you, will pay for repairs required by within the range of movement of the ped- the limited warranties provided with respect als” and at page 225 under the heading: to your vehicle and for maintenance under “Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph the Maintenance Program during the appli- that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should cable warranty and maintenance coverage be disregarded and the following language periods, you are free to elect, both during should be read in lieu thereof: “The manu- those periods and thereafter, to have main- facturer of your vehicle recommends that tenance and repair work provided by other you use floor mats that have been identified service centers or repair shops. by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle 3. Where the Owner's Manual makes refer- and that can be properly fixed in place.” ence to parts and accessories having been 9. At page 173, under the heading: “Have approved by BMW, those references are maintenance carried out,” the sentence intended to reflect that those parts and beginning, “The maintenance should be accessories are recommended by BMW of carried out …” should be disregarded and North America LLC. You may elect to use the following text should be read in lieu other parts and accessories, but, if you do,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Addendum
thereof: “BMW recommends that you have Information about recommended snow the maintenance carried out by your service chains is available from a service center. center.” 14. At page 200, under the heading “Hood,” the 10. At page 186, under the heading “Tire infla- sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” tion specifications,” the sentence begin- should be disregarded. ning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications 15. At page 203, under the heading: “Engine oil apply to approved tire sizes …” should be change,” the text should be disregarded disregarded. and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: 11. At page 192, under the heading: “Mount- BMW recommends that you have the oil ing,” the paragraph beginning, “Have changed at your BMW dealer's service cen- mounting and balancing …” should be dis- ter or at another service center that has regarded and the following text should be trained personnel that can perform the work read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends in accordance with BMW specifications. that you have mounting and balancing per- 16. At page 205, under the heading: “Service formed by your service center or a tire and Warranty Information Booklet for US mounting specialist.” models and Warranty and Service Guide 12. At page 193, under the heading: “Approved Booklet for Canadian models,” the second wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” paragraph should be disregarded and the should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, following text read in lieu thereof: the term “Recommended” should be read The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- in its place. In addition, the text of that sec- mends that you have maintenance and tion should be disregarded and the follow- repair performed by your BMW dealer's ser- ing text should be read in lieu thereof: vice center or another service center or The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly repair shop that employs trained personnel suggests that you use wheels and tires that that can perform maintenance and repair have been recommended by the vehicle work on your vehicle in accordance with manufacturer for your vehicle type; other- BMW specifications. The manufacturer of wise, for example, despite having the same your vehicle recommends that you maintain official size ratings, variations can lead to records of all maintenance and repair work body contact and with it, the risk of severe performed on your vehicle. accidents. 17. At page 208, where it reads: “Do not per- The manufacturer of your vehicle does not form work/bulb replacement on xenon evaluate non-recommended wheels and headlights,” that text should be disregarded tires to determine if they are suitable for use and in lieu thereof the following text should on your vehicle. be read: “Xenon headlight work or replace- 13. At page 197, under the heading: “Snow ment can cause serious and fatal injuries.” Chains,” the text should be disregarded and In the text that follows, where it reads: the following text should be read in lieu “[h]ave any work on the xenon lighting thereof: system … ,” the following words should be Only certain types of fine-link snow chains read as preceding that passage: “It is have been tested by the manufacturer of strongly suggested that you …” your vehicle and are determined by the 18. At page 214, under the “Battery replace- manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe ment” section, the text should be disre- and are recommended by the manufacturer garded and in lieu thereof the following text of your vehicle. should be read:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Addendum
Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available. After a battery replacement, the manufac- turer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all com- fort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 182 Refueling page 232. 184 Fuel 186 Wheels and tires 199 Engine compartment 6 Notes 201 Engine oil At a glance 204 Coolant 14 Cockpit 205 Maintenance 18 iDrive 207 Replacing components 27 Voice activation system 216 Breakdown assistance 30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 222 Care
Controls Reference 34 Opening and closing 228 Technical data 49 Adjusting 232 Everything from A to Z 59 Transporting children safely 63 Driving 76 Displays 91 Lights 96 Safety 118 Driving stability control systems 123 Driving comfort 144 Climate control 151 Interior equipment 159 Storage compartments
Driving tips 166 Things to remember when driving 169 Loading 172 Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 6
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed Orientation precisely in order to avoid the possibility of The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ personal injury and serious damage to the ular topic is by using the index. vehicle. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of the first chapter. information. Refers to measures that can be taken to Updates made after the editorial help protect the environment. deadline "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to Any updates made after the editorial deadline select individual functions. for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice vehicle. activation system. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the User's manual for Navigation, voice activation system. Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Symbols on vehicle components munication and the short commands of the Indicates that you should consult the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for arate user's manual, which is also included information on a particular part or assembly. with the onboard literature.
Vehicle features and options Additional sources of This Owner's Manual describes all models and information all standard, country-specific and optional The service center will be happy to answer any equipment that is offered in the model series. other questions you may have. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. lected optional features or the country-specific BMW Driver’s Guide App version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ The respectively applicable country provisions tries as an app. Additional information on the must be observed when using the respective Internet: features and systems. www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Handbooks.
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 7
Notes
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Therefore, have this work performed only by a are arranged differently from what is shown in BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ the illustrations. ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. If work is not carried out properly, there is a Status of the Owner's danger of subsequent damage and related Manual safety hazards.
Basic information Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ policy of constant development that is con‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from advice. those in your vehicle. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. Updates made after the editorial deadline BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility Any updates made after the editorial deadline whatsoever for parts and accessories that have for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ not been specifically approved by BMW. pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a For your own safety safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply when country-specific government approval Warranty has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐ Your vehicle is technically configured for the ating conditions to which components might operating conditions and registration require‐ be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products ments applying in the country of first delivery - could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated own stringent quality standards. in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ California Proposition 65 Warning ating conditions and permit requirements. If California laws require us to state the following your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ warning: gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ there. Further information can be obtained bile components and parts, including compo‐ from your Service Centre. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain materials and high-performance electronics, products of component wear contain or emit requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 8
Notes
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures: ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used for US models engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty. lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment: listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and levels for instance. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration. country and continental region in order to de‐ ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating ing the stability control system. conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ Maintenance pair services, service processes, warranty Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ road safety, operational reliability and the New mation can be read out from the event and Vehicle Limited Warranty. fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 9
Notes
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, nostic tools. You can obtain further information gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. there if you need it. After an error is corrected, However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ the information in the fault memory is deleted ment, could combine the EDR data with the or overwritten on a continuous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ With the vehicle in use there are situations quired during a crash investigation. where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment, Additional functions that are contractually can read the information if they have access to agreed with the customer - such as vehicle the vehicle or the EDR. emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle. Vehicle identification number Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or The vehicle identification number can be found less. in the engine compartment. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: The vehicle identification number can also be ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were found behind the windshield. operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. Reporting safety defects ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing For US customers the accelerator and/or brake pedal. The following only applies to vehicles owned ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. and operated in the US. These data can help provide a better under‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect standing of the circumstances in which which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ crashes and injuries occur. jury or death, you should immediately inform EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of recorded by the EDR under normal driving North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 10
Notes
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 11
Notes
11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblinds 47 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ 2 Power windows 46 tion 115 3 Exterior mirror operation 56 Intelligent Safety 105 4 Glove compartment on the driver's side 159 Lane departure warning 113 Driver assistance systems
5 Lights
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lights 94 Reduce distance 123
Parking lights 91 Increase distance 123
Low beams 91 Cruise control rocker switch 129, 123 8 Instrument cluster 76 Automatic headlight con‐ 9 Steering wheel buttons, right trol 92 Entertainment source Daytime running lights 92 Adaptive Light Control 92 Volume High-beam Assistant 93 Instrument lighting 94 Voice activation 27
6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for Turn signal 67 Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 85 light flasher 67 10 Steering column stalk, right High-beam Assistant 93 Wiper 68
Roadside parking lights 92 Rain sensor 69
On-board computer 85 Clean the windshields and head‐ lights 70
7 Steering wheel buttons, left 11 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 64 Store speed 129, 123 Auto Start/Stop function 65 Resume speed 129, 123 12 Horn, total area Cruise control on/off, inter‐ 13 Steering wheel heating 58 rupt 129
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐ 14 Adjust steering wheel 58 terrupting 123 15 Unlock hood 200
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18 9 PDC Park Distance Control 131 2 Ventilation 149 Rearview camera 134 3 Hazard warning system 216 Parking assistant 139 Surround View 134 Central locking system 39 Side View 136
4 Glove compartment 159 10 Driving Dynamics Control 120 5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ nication DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ 6 Climate control 144 trol 118 7 Controller with buttons 18 11 Steptronic transmission selector 8 Parking brake 67 lever 71 Manual transmission selector lever 71
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
All around the roofliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights 94 quest 216
2 Glass sunroof, powered 47 5 Interior lights 94
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ senger airbag 98
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control Display This chapter describes all standard, country- Hints specific and optional features offered with the ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the series. It also describes features that are not care instructions. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control also applies to safety-related functions and Display; otherwise, the Control Display can systems. The respectively applicable country be damaged. provisions must be observed when using the ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on respective features and systems. the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐ lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐ duced down to complete deactivation. The concept Once the temperature is reduced, e.g. through shadow or climate control system, The iDrive combines the functions of many the normal functions are re-established. switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location. Switching on Using the iDrive during a trip 1. Switch on the ignition. To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ 2. Press the controller. ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other traffic, never attempt Switch off to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ 1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" Control elements at a glance
Control elements
Controller with navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select 1 Control Display menu items and enter the settings. 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Some iDrive functions can be operated using the equipment version, with touchpad the touchpad on the controller.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
1. Turn. Press button Function
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. 1. Turn. 2. Press.
2. Press. 3. Move in four directions.
3. Move in two directions. Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
Buttons on controller Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. Press button Function 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu MENU Open the main menu. item is highlighted. Audio Open audio menu last listened to, switch between audio me‐ nus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
2. Press the controller. Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual Opening the main menu In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be Press button. selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".
Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Closes current display and shows previous display. Reopens previous display by pressing BACK button. In this case, the current The main menu is displayed. panel is not closed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the ▷ Move the controller to the right. main menu. Opens new display on top of previous screen.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting cate that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.
Display of an opened menu When selecting a menu, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. 3. Press the controller. Opening the Options menu Press button. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Function is activated. Function is deactivated.
Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller: Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is Selecting functions displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Touchpad" Options menu 3. Select the desired function. The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐ This area remains unchanged. tive map. ▷ Control options for the selected main ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered ▷ If applicable, further operating options for letters and numbers. the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Entering letters and numbers Changing settings Entering letters requires some practice at the 1. Select a field. beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following:
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Example: setting the clock and numbers, it may be necessary to reel via the controller to the corresponding In‐ Setting the clock put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the On the Control Display: spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical. 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐ ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on played. the Control Display. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ ▷ Always enter associated characters, such lighted, and then press the controller. as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐ pends on the set language. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the con‐ troller. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad. ▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left upper area of the touchpad. to display "Time/Date". ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is in the lower area of the touchpad. highlighted, and then press the controller. Using interactive map and Internet Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites. Function Controls
Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐ Internet sites. spective direc‐ tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ map or Internet sites. the touchpad with lighted, and then press the controller. fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once. a link in the Internet.
Changing settings You may change control display settings via touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning press the controller. Text message was received. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
Status information SIM card is missing.
Status field Enter PIN. The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols ▷ Time. Symbol Meaning ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection. ▷ Phone status. Gracenote® database. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. AUX-IN port.
Status field symbols USB audio interface. The symbols are grouped as follows. Mobile phone audio interface. Radio symbols Additional symbols Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning HD Radio station is being received. Spoken instructions are turned off. Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols Split screen Symbol Meaning General information Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the Missed call. right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the on-board comupter. Wireless network reception In the divided screen view, the so-called split strength. screen, this information remains visible even Symbol flashes: network search. when you change to another menu. Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
Switching the split screen on and off Without navigation system and On the Control Display: telephone Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐ 1. Press button. tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication. 2. "Split screen" Saving a function Selecting the display 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. On the Control Display: 2. Press and hold the desired button, 1. Press button. until a signal sounds. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is Running a function selected. Press button. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen The function will work immediately. content". This means, e.g., that the number is dialed 5. Select the desired menu item. when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen.
Programmable memory buttons
General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Deleting the button assignments rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for tions, phone numbers and menu entries. approx. five seconds. Settings are stored for the profile currently in 2. "OK" use.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
Deleting personal in the Entering letters and numbers vehicle General information The concept On the Control Display: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ personal data, such as stored radio stations. bers. These personal data can be permanently de‐ 2. Select additional letters or numbers if leted through iDrive. needed. General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function ▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐ ▷ Stored radio stations. ter or number. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended ▷ Travel and computer information. period: delete all letters or numbers. ▷ Music collection. ▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and numbers ▷ Phone book. Depending on the menu, you can reel between ▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. entering upper and lower case, letters and ▷ Voice notes. numbers: ▷ Login accounts. Symbol Function ▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering. Enter the letters. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.
or Tip controller up. Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Without navigation system Deleting data Select the symbol. Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ trol Display. Entry comparison Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ 2. "Settings" ters may be added automatically. 3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data 4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle. 5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available. 6. "OK"
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
▷ Target search: names of locations may be entered in languages available through Control Display.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options Using voice activation This chapter describes all standard, country- Activating the voice activation system specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 1. Press button on the steering necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheel. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal. systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command. provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ The concept cates that the voice activation system is active. ▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐ Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive. mands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation during input. system ▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐ vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. voice activation system. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. Possible commands ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can system. be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ Requirements play. Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions. also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐ fied. actly as they show in the respective list. Set the language, refer to page 89. Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
Executing functions using short commands 2. Press button on the steering wheel. Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which 3. ›Tone‹ menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. List of short commands for the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Setting the voice dialog munication Owner's Manual. Set system to standard dialog or use a short version. Help dialog for the voice activation The short version of the voice dialog plays system back short messages in abbreviated form. Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ 1. "Settings" Additional commands for the help dialog: 2. "Language/Units" ▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ tion about the current operating options 3. "Speech type:" and the most important commands for 4. Select setting. them. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone settings
Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ needed. struction until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the 2. Press button on the steering volume of other audio sources is changed. wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ 3. ›Radio‹ rently in use. 4. ›Tone‹
Via short command Hints on Emergency The desired tone settings can also be started Requests via a short command. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ needed. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 216, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Select components
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button. specific and optional features offered with the 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info". series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller. the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range: also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference" systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures" respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle.
Components of the Integrated Leafing through the Owner's Manual Owner's Manual The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Turn the controller until the next or previous mation or possible access. page is displayed. Quick Reference Guide Page by page without link access The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐ tion how to operate the car, how to use basic ping the links. vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page. Scroll back. Search by images Image search provides information and de‐ scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward. ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual Search for information and descriptions by en‐ tering terms selected from the index.
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di‐ General information rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Opening via the iDrive rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more menu is displayed. than 2 seconds. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Executing Opening when a Check Control Press button. message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ Directly from the Check Control message on mediately. the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate permanently between the last dis‐ played function and the Owner's Manual re‐ peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking Remote control/key 3 Opening the trunk lid General information 4 Panic mode The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key. Integrated key Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐ tery. You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver‐ sion. For Settings, refer to page 43. The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 35. The remote controls hold information on re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐ mote control, refer to page 205 row 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41. The front passenger glove compartment con‐ tains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41.
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
Replacing the battery ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ trol. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up. 5. Press the cover closed. Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding Take the used battery to a recycling Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ center or to your service center. mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while New remote controls pressing the brake. New remote controls are available from the Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check service center. Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on Loss of the remote controls the steering column and press the Start/Stop Lost remote controls can be disabled by your button within 10 seconds while pressing the service center. clutch pedal. If the remote control is not recognized: slightly Emergency detection of remote change the height position of the remote con‐ control trol and repeat the procedure. It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ Personal Profile mote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts. The concept ▷ Empty battery in remote control. Personal Profile provides three profiles, using ▷ Interference from radio transmissions which personal vehicle settings can be stored. through mobile devices in close proximity Every remote control has one of these profiles to remote control. assigned. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ Profile management tomatically applied. If several drivers use their own remote control, Opening profiles the vehicle will adjust the personal settings Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ ferent profile may be activated. stored, if the vehicle has been used in the 1. "Settings" meantime by a person with a different remote control. 2. "Profiles" Changes to the settings are automatically 3. Select a profile. saved in the personal profile. ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile Three personal profiles and a guest profile can are automatically applied. be created. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ mote control being used at the time. Adjusting ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ The settings for the following systems and ent remote control, this profile will apply to functions are saved in the active profile. The both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ scope of storable settings is country- and tiated anymore between the settings for equipment-dependable. the two remote controls. ▷ Unlocking and locking. Renaming profiles ▷ Lights. A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ ▷ Climate control. file to avoid confusion between the profiles. ▷ Radio. 1. "Settings" ▷ Instrument cluster. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Programmable memory buttons. 3. "Options" ▷ Volumes, tone. 4. "Rename current profile" ▷ Control Display. ▷ Navigation. Resetting profiles ▷ Park Distance Control PDC. The settings of the active profile are reset to ▷ Rearview camera their default values.
▷ Side View. 1. "Settings" ▷ Head-up Display. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 3. "Options" ▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ 4. "Reset current profile" tion, steering wheel position. ▷ Cruise control. Exporting profiles ▷ Intelligent Safety. Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐ ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. ported. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ Display profile list during start file function. The profile list can be displayed during each The following export options are available: start to select the desired profile. ▷ Via BMW Online. 1. "Settings" ▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 2. "Profiles" Popular file systems for USB devices are 3. "Options" supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ 4. "Display user list at startup" ommended formats for profile export. Other formats may not support the export. 1. "Settings" Using the remote control 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" Note 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Take the remote control with you USB interface: "USB device" People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ Importing profiles side. Always take the remote control with you Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle imported via BMW Online. can then be opened from the outside.◀ Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ ported via the USB interface. Unlocking Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ Press button on the remote control. ported profile. 1. "Settings" ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being unlocked. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐ 3. "Import profile" vated. This function is not available, if the 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" interior lamps were switched off manually. USB interface: "USB device" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated. Using the guest profile ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient The guest profile is for individual settings that closing are folded open. are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. files. For Settings, refer to page 43. This can be useful for drivers who are using The alarm system, refer to page 44, is dis‐ the vehicle temporarily and do not have their armed. own profile.
1. "Settings" Convenient opening 2. "Profiles" Press and hold this button on the re‐ 3. "Guest" mote control after unlocking. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control.
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
The windows and the glass sunroof are The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the opened, as long as the button on the remote vehicle was previously locked or unlocked. control is pressed. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available Locking before opening. Locking from the outside Depending on the features and the country Do not lock the vehicle from the outside version, it is also possible to have door un‐ with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43. not be unlocked from inside without special If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is knowledge.◀ locked again as soon as it closes. The driver's door must be closed. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Press button on the remote control. Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are mote control is locked inside the vehicle when being locked. the trunk lid is closed.◀ The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed.
Switching on interior lights and Malfunction courtesy lights Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ Press button on the remote control with lowing circumstances: the vehicle locked. ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ This function is not available, if the interior charged. Replace the battery, refer to lamps were switched off manually. page 35. If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ transmission towers or other equipment tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti- with high transmit power. theft warning system, refer to page 45, are ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ metal objects. fore pressing the button again. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices Panic mode in direct proximity. You can trigger the alarm system if you find Do not transport the remote control together yourself in a dangerous situation. with metal objects or electronic devices. Press button on the remote control for In the case of interference, the vehicle can also at least 3 seconds. be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ out remote control, refer to page 39. To reel off the alarm: press any button.
Opening the trunk lid For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with Press button on the remote control for part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication approx. 1 second.
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: ▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. ▷ LX8CAS. ▷ LX8CAS2. ▷ MYTCAS4. Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door Compliance statement: lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC The other doors must be unlocked or locked Rules. Operation is subject to the following from the inside. two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ Alarm system ference, and The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is ▷ this device must accept any interference locked with the integrated key. received, including interference that may The alarm system is triggered when the door is cause undesired operation. opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the Any unauthorized modifications or changes to door lock. these devices could void the user's authority to In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle operate this equipment. with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if needed, through emergency detection Without remote control of the remote control, refer to page 35. From the inside From the outside Locking from the outside Unlocking and locking Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.◀ Pressing the central locking system button locks or unlocks the vehicle with the doors closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ automatically unlocked. The hazard warning trol for approx. 1 second. system and interior lights come on. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ locked. Unlocking with the remote control, Unlocking and opening refer to page 38. The trunk lid opens.
Opening from the inside With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell.
The trunk lid opens.
Closing ▷ Press the central locking system button to unlock the doors together, and then pull Hints the door handle above the armrest. Keep the closing path clear ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door Make sure that the closing path of the handle twice: the first time unlocks the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ door, the second time opens it. The other sult.◀ doors remain locked. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Trunk lid Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ Opening mote control is locked inside the vehicle when During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and the trunk lid is closed.◀ up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available Closing before opening.
Opening from the outside
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
▷ Press button on the trunk lid.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
Locking separately Comfort Access supports the following func‐ The trunk lid can be locked separately with the tions: switch in the glove compartment. If the glove ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be ▷ Convenient closing. opened. ▷ Open the trunk lid individually. ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation. ▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ ▷ Start the engine. row 2. Functional requirements
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from ence nearby. the central locking system. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked must be located outside of the vehicle. using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not trol can be handed out without the key. possible until after approx. 2 seconds. ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ Emergency unlocking mote control is in the vehicle.
Unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow. Comfort Access This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
Locking In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in.
Separately unlocking the trunk lid Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the re‐ mote control button. The situation of the doors does not change. Do not place the remote control in the Touch the surface on the door handle of the cargo area driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ Take the remote control with you and do not ing the door handle. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when This corresponds with pressing the button on the trunk lid is closed.◀ the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition Opening trunk lid with no-touch and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ activation sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐ cle. The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch ac‐ tivation using the remote control you are carry‐ ing. Two sensors detect a forward-directed Convenient closing foot motion in the center of the area at the rear Monitor closing of the car and the trunk lid opens. Monitor closing to ensure that no one Foot movement to be carried out becomes trapped.◀ Do not touch vehicle With the foot motion, make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot exhaust system parts.◀
1. Place in the center behind the vehicle, about an arm's length from the vehicle rear. 2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ Touch the surface on the door handle of the ately pull it back. With this movement, the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle. This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
leg must pass through the ranges of both ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to sensors. metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 39.
Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier. Adjusting Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ tem flashes. Unlocking The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ was previously locked or unlocked. fer to page 35. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available Doors before opening. 1. "Settings" Preventing inadvertent opening 2. "Doors/key" In situations where the trunk lid is not to 3. Select the symbol. be opened with no-touch activation, ensure 4. Select the desired function: that the remote control is located beyond the ▷ "Driver's door only" range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from Only the driver's door and the fuel filler the rear of the car. flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ locks the entire vehicle. vertently, for example by an unintentional or ▷ "All doors" misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ The entire vehicle is unlocked. Malfunction Trunk lid Remote control detection by the vehicle can Depending on optional features and country among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ version, this setting is not offered in some lowing circumstances: cases. ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to 1. "Settings" page 35. 2. "Doors/key" ▷ Interference of the radio connection from 3. Select the symbol. transmission towers or other equipment 4. Select the desired function: with high transmit power. ▷ "Tailgate" The trunk lid is opened.
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" objects damaged when the seat is moved The trunk lid is opened and the doors back.◀ are unlocked. The adjustment procedure is interrupted: ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. Confirmation signals from the vehicle ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ ory is pressed. fer to page 35. 1. "Settings" Activating the setting 2. "Doors/key" 1. "Settings" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ 2. "Doors/key" mation signals. 3. "Last seat position autom." ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Alarm system Automatic locking The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ The concept fer to page 35. When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to: 1. "Settings" ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. 2. "Doors/key" ▷ Movements in the interior. 3. Select the desired function: ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing The vehicle locks automatically after a the car. short period of time if no door is ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. opened. The alarm system briefly signals tampering: ▷ "Lock after start driving" ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. The vehicle locks automatically after ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ you drive off. tem. Retrieving the seat and mirror settings ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ Arming and disarming the alarm rently in use. system When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ are automatically retrieved if this function was cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at activated. the same time. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure Door lock and armed alarm system that the footwell behind the driver's seat is The alarm system is triggered when the door is empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
Trunk lid and armed alarm system ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking The trunk lid can be opened even when the until the engine ignition is switched on, but alarm system is armed. no longer than approx. 5 minutes: After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and An alarm has been triggered. monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. Panic mode The alarm system responds in situations such You can trigger the alarm system if you find as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is yourself in a dangerous situation. towed. Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be To switch off the alarm: press any button. closed for the system to function properly. Indicator lamp on the interior rearview Avoiding unintentional alarms mirror The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and 2 seconds: interior motion sensor The system is armed. Press the remote control button again ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed is locked. properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ cured. onds and then continues to flash. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. again. When the still open access is closed, inte‐ rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will Switching off the alarm be switched on. ▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ switch on the ignition, if needed through ing: emergency detection of remote control, re‐ The vehicle has not been tampered with. fer to page 35.
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance the driver side or front passenger side door point. handle completely. The window closes while the switch is held.
Power windows ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. Hint The window closes automatically. Pulling Take the remote control with you again stops the motion. Take the remote control with you when See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ refer to page 41. not operate the power windows and injure themselves.◀ Pinch protection system Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the win‐ dow's range of movement; otherwise, the Opening pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a ▷ Press the button to the resistance window closes, closing is interrupted. point. The window reopens slightly. The window opens while the switch is held. Closing without the pinch protection ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ system ance point. Keep the closing path clear The window opens automatically. Pressing Monitor closing and make sure that the the switch again stopse the motion. closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, See also: Convenient opening, refer to injuries may result.◀ page 37, via remote control. E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ Closing vent window from closing properly - proceed as follows: Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the 1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, hold it there. injuries may result.◀
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin. 2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without jam protection.
Roller sunblinds Tilting the glass sunroof Roller sunblind for rear window Push switch briefly upward. General information ▷ The closed glass sunroof is If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ tilted. blind for the rear window after having activated ▷ The opened glass sunroof it a number of times in a row, the system is closes until it is in its tilted blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐ position. The sliding visor ing. Let the system cool. does not move. The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot be moved at low interior temperatures. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together Extending or retracting roller sunblind for rear window ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction to the resistance Press button. point and hold it there. Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor open together as long as Glass sunroof, powered the reel is held down. The glass sunroof closes as General information long as the reel is held down. The sliding visor can The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ be manually closed. tion is switched on. ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past Keep the closing path clear the resistance point. Monitor closing and make sure that the The glass sunroof and sliding visor open closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ automatically. erwise, injuries may result.◀ The glass sunroof closes automatically. Take the remote control with you The sliding visor can be manually closed. Take the remote control with you when Pressing the reel upward stops the motion. leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ Additional options: not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐ selves.◀ ▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via the remote control.
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer Closing from the raised position to page 41. without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐ Comfort position ward past the resistance point and hold it. If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐ The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐ pletely opened, the comfort position has been tion. attained. In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least. Initializing after a power failure If desired, continue the movement by pressing After a power failure during the opening or the reel. closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ Initializing the system roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ The system can be initialized when the vehicle ment is stopped, beginning at approximately is stationary and the engine is running. the middle of the opening in the roof, or from During the initialization, the glass sunroof the tilted position during closing. closes without jam protection. The glass sunroof reopens slightly. Keep the closing path clear Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ Monitor closing and make sure that the tection closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ Despite the pinch protection system, check erwise, injuries may result.◀ that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐ Press the reel up and hold it until rupted in certain extreme situations, such as the initialization is complete: when thin objects are present.◀ ▷ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com‐ Closing from the open position pleted when the glass sun‐ without pinch protection roof is completely closed. E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as ▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐ follows: tection.
1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold. The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin. 2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐ roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep This chapter describes all standard, country- the seat's area of movement unobstructed; specific and optional features offered with the otherwise, people might get injured or objects series. It also describes features that are not damaged.◀ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Manually adjustable seats systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the At a glance respective features and systems.
Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53. 1 Forward/backward ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54. 2 Thigh support ▷ Airbags, refer to page 96. 3 Seat tilt 4 Backrest width Seats 5 Lumbar support 6 Height Hints 7 Backrest tilt Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected Forward/backward movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally pro‐ vided by the belt.◀ Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat ward or back slightly making sure it engages engages properly. properly. Electrically adjustable seats Height At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary. 1 Seat and mirror memory 2 Backrest width Backrest tilt 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐ cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐ sition is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page 44, is activated for this purpose. Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back. Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.
Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. 4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.
Backrest width Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support.
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
Front seat heating Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ment. 1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the journey is continued within approx. 15 2. Fold backrest forward. minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ 3. Push the seat forward. ically with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐ Original position vated, the heater output is reduced. 1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐ tion. Switch off 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. Press button longer. Electric forward/backward adjustment The LEDs go out. Comfort entry Entering the rear The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ Note ment. Folding back and locking the backrest 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Before driving off, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀
2. Fold backrest forward. 3. To change the entry area:
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
▷ Press and hold this button until Hints the seat has moved to the de‐ One person per safety belt sired position. Releasing the button stops window/roof movement. Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or ▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐ small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ tomatically moves to the end po‐ sition. Pressing again stops the motion. Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly Original position across the lap and shoulders, as close to the 1. Moving the seat to its original position: body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies ▷ Press and hold this button until low around the hips in the lap area and does the seat has moved to its original not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt position. Releasing the button stops can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐ window/roof movement. jure the abdomen. ▷ Press button briefly. The seat The safety belt must not lie across the neck, moves to its original position. rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable Pressing again stops the motion. objects, or be pinched.◀
2. Folding the backrest back. What reduces the restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull Safety belts the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the Seats with safety belt restraining effect is reduced.◀ The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. Buckling the belt General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point the belt buckle. will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ nism.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
Safety belt reminder for driver's and If the safety belt has not yet been applied, the passenger's seat belt carrier goes back under the following cir‐ cumstances: The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety ▷ Waiting time approx. five minutes. belts are positioned correctly. The ▷ Opening the respective door. safety belt reminder is active at speeds above ▷ After a short trip. approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger ▷ Locking the vehicle. seat. If the respective door is closed, the belt carrier is re-activated when the vehicle key has been detected in the interior. Damage to safety belts Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ Pinch protection system aged otherwise: Free range of movement of the belt car‐ Have the safety belts, including the safety belt rier tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. Even with pinch protection, make sure that the range of motion of the belt carrier remains free. Check and replace safety belts Otherwise, an interruption is not guaranteed This should only be done by your service under certain circumstances.◀ center; otherwise, this safety feature might not If the belt carrier encounters resistance when work properly.◀ extending or retracting, the belt carrier moves back somewhat in the respective opposite. Af‐ Belt carrier ter two attempts, the belt carrier stops in this position. The concept To reactivate the belt carrier, open and close The belt carrier makes it easier to put on the the door. safety belt.
General information Headrests
Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀ After the door is closed and the vehicle key has been detected in the car's interior, the belt car‐ rier extends automatically and keeps the safety Height belt ready to put on, arrow. After the belt is put Adjust the head restraint so that its center is on, it goes back into the idle position. approximately at ear level.
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.
Adjusting the height
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ sistance. 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely. Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ ▷ To raise: push. tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push able.◀ headrest down.
Tilt Seat and mirror memory Three different tilt positions are available. Hints Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat could result in an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects ▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ damaged.◀ straint forward, arrow 1. ▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head The concept restraint folds as far back as possible. Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and Removing called up. Settings for the backrest width and Only remove the head restraint if no one will be lumbar support are not stored in memory. sitting in the seat in question.
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
At a glance Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Storing Mirrors 1. Switch on the ignition. Exterior mirrors 2. Set the desired position. General information 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ ton lights up. The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. 4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ ror setting is stored for the profile currently in If the SET button is pressed accidentally: use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ Press button again. mote control, the position is automatically re‐ The LED goes out. trieved if this function is active. Note Calling up settings Estimating distances correctly Comfort function Objects reflected in the mirror are closer 1. Open the driver's door. than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you 2. Switch off the ignition. see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. of an accident.◀ The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐ tion. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com‐ pleted.
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
At a glance 2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.
Fold in and out Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx. 1 Adjusting 57 15 mph/20 km/h. 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor E. g. this is advantageous 3 Fold in and out 57 ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. Selecting a mirror ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were To change over to the other mirror: folded away manually. Slide the switch. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Adjusting electrically Fold in the mirror in a car wash The setting corresponds to the direc‐ Before washing the car in an automatic tion in which the button is pressed. car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could Saving positions be damaged, depending on the width of the Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 55. vehicle.◀
Adjusting manually Automatic heating In case of electrical malfunction press edges of Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated mirror. whenever the engine is running.
Automatic Curb Monitor Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ The concept med. Photocells are used to control the Interior If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on rearview mirror, refer to page 58. the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
Interior rearview mirror, manually Steering wheel dimmable Note Turn knob Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature
The concept 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Photocells are used for control: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement For proper operation: Press button. ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside ▷ On: the LED lights up. rearview mirror and the windshield. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 59
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
The right place for children Note Note Children in the vehicle Deactivating the front-seat passenger Do not leave children unattended in the airbags vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ If a child restraint system is used in the front selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ doors.◀ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ Children should always be in the rear bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Installing child restraint Only transport children younger than systems 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in Hints accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk Manufacturer's information for child re‐ of injury in an accident. straint systems Children 13 years of age or older must wear a To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐ safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tems, observe the information provided by the system can no longer be used due to their age, system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐ weight and size.◀ tive effect can be lost.◀ Ensuring the stability of the child seat Children on the front passenger seat When installing child restraint systems, Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and make sure that the front, knee and side airbags headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ on the front passenger side are deactivated. justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise ger airbags, refer to page 98. the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 60
Controls Transporting children safely
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐ rest.◀ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀ Adjustable backrest width: before installing a On the front passenger seat child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do Deactivating airbags not change the backrest width again and do Deactivating the front-seat passenger not call up a memory position. airbags Child seat security If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. The rear safety belts and the front passenger Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ automatically, refer to page 98. ten child restraint systems. Seat position and height The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems. Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and Locking the safety belt thus best possible position for the belt and to 1. Pull out the strap completely. offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ 2. Secure the child restraint system with the dent. belt. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, tight against the child restraint system. move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ The safety belt is locked. til the best possible belt guide position is reached. Unlocking the safety belt Backrest width 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. Backrest width for the child seat 2. Remove the child restraint system. Before installing a child restraint system 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely. in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 61
Transporting children safely Controls
LATCH child restraint system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ Before installing LATCH child dren. restraint systems Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐ Note straint system. Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint systems Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ the user's manual of the system. erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ duced.◀ erly connected.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child Mounting points and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. The respective symbol shows the an‐ chor for the upper retaining strap. Note Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint Note system is resting snugly against the backrest; Mounting eyelets otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐ Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐ duced.◀ per retaining strap to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could Position be damaged.◀ The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Retaining strap guide Seats equipped with lower anchors are Retaining strap marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐ bols. Use of inner lower anchors from Make sure the upper retaining strap does standard outboard LATCH positions to not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as install a child restraint system in the center is it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the not recommended. For the center position, strap will not properly secure the child restraint use the vehicle seat belt instead. system in the event of an accident.◀
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
1 Direction of travel 2 Upper retaining strap 3 Head restraint 4 Rear window shelf 5 Mounting point/eye 6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Lift the cover over the mounting point. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the head restraint. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 63
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options Ignition off Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop This chapter describes all standard, country- button again without stepping on the brake. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal. the selected options or country versions. This All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go also applies to safety-related functions and out. systems. The respectively applicable country To save battery power when the engine is off, provisions must be observed when using the switch off the ignition and any unnecessary respective features and systems. electronic systems/power consumers. P when the ignition is switched off Start/Stop button P is engaged automatically when the ig‐ nition is switched off. When in an automatic car The concept wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off The ignition automatically cuts off while the and starts the engine. vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: Steptronic transmission: The ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the engine starts if the brakes are low beams are activated. stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged ton. completely, so that the engine can still be Manual transmission: The engine starts with started. This function is only available the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop when the low beams are turned off. button is pressed. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and Ignition on the low beams are turned off. Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled button without stepping on the brake. with driver's door open and low beams off. Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ The low beams switch to parking lights after ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. approx. 15 minutes of no use. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Radio ready state Most of the indicator and warning lights in the Activate radio-ready state: instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time. ▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary Some electronic systems/power consumers electronic systems/power consumers. remain ready for operation.
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 64
Controls Driving
The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ Repeated starting in quick succession cally: Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐ ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, tral locking system. posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.◀ ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while started. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., moderate engine speeds. the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: Steptronic transmission ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. Starting the engine ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. 1. Depress the brake pedal. ▷ When automatically switching from low 2. Press the Start/Stop button. beams to parking lights. The ignition is activated automatically for a If the engine is switched off and the ignition is certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ switched on, the system automatically gine starts. switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, Manual transmission the daytime running lights are activated. Starting the engine Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐ Hints tral. Enclosed areas 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Do not let the engine run in enclosed The ignition is activated automatically for a areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ lead to loss of consciousness and death. The gine starts. exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Engine stop Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with Hints the engine running; doing so poses a risk of Take the remote control with you danger. Take the remote control with you when Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ not start the engine.◀ mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐ vent the vehicle from moving.◀ Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed. Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 65
Driving Controls
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ is available when the vehicle is traveling faster hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. direction of the curb.◀ Engine stop Before driving into a car wash The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ ing a stop under the following conditions: serve instructions for going into an automatic Steptronic transmission: car wash, refer to page 222. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D. Steptronic transmission ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped. Switching off the engine ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the 1. Engage selector lever position P with the driver's door is closed. vehicle stopped. Manual transmission: 2. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is The engine is switched off. not pressed. The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the 3. Set the parking brake. driver's door is closed. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced Manual transmission when the engine is switched off. Switching off the engine Displays in the instrument cluster 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button. The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. Start/Stop function is ready to 3. Set the parking brake. start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met. The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic Functional limitations lights. The ignition remains switched on. The The engine is not switched off automatically in engine starts again automatically for driving the following situations: off. ▷ External temperature too low. Automatic mode ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ After every start of the engine using the Start/ matic climate control is running. Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated the last selected state, refer to page 66. or cooled to the required level. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 66
Controls Driving
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ Functional limitations ature. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ steering wheel is being turned. lowing situations: ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ when the cooling function is switched on. matic climate control is switched on. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ ▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or matic climate control is switched on. R. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when Starting the engine the heating is switched on. The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐ lowing conditions: cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession. ▷ Steptronic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal. Activating/deactivating the system ▷ Manual transmission: manually The clutch pedal is pressed. Using the button After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied Press button. length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is Stop button. deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 67
Driving Controls
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is Releasing activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e. g., when leaving it. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ the lever down. matically. Hints 2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Use while driving On rare occasions if it is necessary to use Automatic deactivation the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐ In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function cessive force when applying it. When using it, is deactivated automatically for safety reasons keep the button on the lever depressed. as if the driver were absent. Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ ing the parking brake may cause the rear Malfunction wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀ The Auto Start/Stop function no longer To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐ switches off the engine automatically. A Check tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically Control message is displayed. It is possible to while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. continue driving. Have the system checked. The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set. Parking brake Turn signal, high beams, Applying headlight flasher The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. Turn signal The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. Hints Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian Do not adjust the exterior mirrors models Do not adjust the exterior mirror while driving and when turn signals/hazard warning flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐ nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐ tion and can't be seen.◀
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 68
Controls Driving
Using turn signals High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. ▷ High beams, arrow 1. To switch off manually, press the lever to the ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2. resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Washer/wiper system
Triple turn signal activation Switching the wipers on/off and brief Press the lever to the resistance point. wipe The turn signal flashes three times. Hints The function can be activated or deactivated. Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐ On the Control Display: shield 1. "Settings" Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen 2. "Lighting" to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀ 3. "Triple turn signal" Settings are stored for the profile currently in Do not activate wipers on dry windshield use. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or Signaling briefly cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ Press the lever to the resistance point and hold Do not activate wipers with wipers folded it there for as long as you want the turn signal away to flash. Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be damaged.◀
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 69
Driving Controls
Switching on Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror.
Activating/deactivating Push wiper lever up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ Press button on the wiper lever. hicle comes to standstill. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up. Switch off and brief wipe When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐ intentional wiping can cause damages.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Push wiper lever down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Single wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Turn the thumbwheel.
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 70
Controls Driving
Clean the windshield, headlights Folding wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation.
Pull the wiper lever towards you. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Washer fluid shield and activates the wipers briefly. Hints In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ Antifreeze for washer fluid vated. Antifreeze is flammable and can cause Do not use the washer system at freezing injury if it is used incorrectly. temperatures Therefore, keep it away from possible sources Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze of ignition. onto the windshield which might impede your Only keep it in the closed original container viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. and inaccessible to children. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ empty; operation might damage pump.◀ tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is Windshield washer nozzles regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ states; do not exceed the allowable washer cally heated while the ignition is switched on. fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ Fold-out position of the wipers tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures. Adding washer fluid 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to 2. With icy conditions make sure that blades avoid contact between the washer fluid and are not frozen to the windshield. hot engine parts. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 71
Driving Controls
Washer fluid reservoir Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
D Drive Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ ation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.
R is Reverse All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ Select only when the vehicle is stationary. ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ N Neutral: centrate and tap water and – if required – with a The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ washes, e.g. turer's recommendations. When the ignition is switched off, refer to Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the page 63, selector lever position P is engaged right mixture. automatically. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure P Park water; this could damage the wiper system. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ drive wheels are blocked. ferent manufacturers because they can clog P is engaged automatically: the windshield washer nozzles. ▷ After the engine is switched off when the Recommended minimum fill quantity: vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to 0.2 US gal/1 liter. page 63, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 63, and when selector lever position R or D is set. Manual transmission ▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐ tion N is set. Shifting ▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the Shifting into 5th or 6th gear driver's door is opened, and the brake When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐ stationary and selector lever position D or vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead R is set. to engine damage.◀ Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ Reverse gear hicle may begin to move. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Kickdown To overcome the resistance push the selector Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐ performance. Step on the accelerator pedal verse gear.
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 72
Controls Driving
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle ▷ Shift out of P. position. Engaging P Engaging selector lever positions Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ ▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied. ▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the Press button P. brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be Sport program and manual mode executed: shift lock. Activating the sport program Engaging D, R and N
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ tor lever position D. rection, beyond a resistance point if needed. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ After releasing the selector lever, it returns to vated. its center position. Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. Press unlock button, in order to: ▷ Engage R.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 73
Driving Controls
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S Shift paddles manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow not possible if the engine speed is too high. you to shift gears quickly while keeping both The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ hands on the steering wheel. strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ ▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. lected gear. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ▷ With the respective transmission version, Steptronic Sport transmission: the lowest possible gear can be selected prevent automatic upshifting in M/S by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. manual mode Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine The Steptronic Sport transmission does not and road speeds, for example downshifting is automatically upshift in M/S manual mode not possible if the engine speed is too high. once the maximum speed is reached, if one of the following conditions is met: The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. ▷ DSC deactivated. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are ▷ TRACTION activated. used to shift gears in automatic mode, the ▷ SPORT+ activated. transmission temporarily switches to manual In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. mode. With the respective transmission version, the If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ sition D with the respective transmission ver‐ taneously operating the kickdown and the left sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐ shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐ matic mode: duced via the shift paddles when switching ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. briefly from D to manual mode. Or Ending the sport program/manual ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift mode paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Push the selector lever to the right. In the manual mode, after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has D is displayed in the instrument cluster. been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 74
Controls Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster Hints The selector lever position is dis‐ Component wear played, e.g.: P. Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀ Electronic unlocking of the Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, transmission lock refer to page 166, period. General information To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area. An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin the engine. Requirements Engaging selector lever position N Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving 1. Depress the brake pedal. of at least 6 miles/10 km. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter To start with Launch Control do not steer the must audibly start. steering wheel. 3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐ tion N. Start with launch control A corresponding Check Control message While the engine is running: is displayed.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐ 1. Press button or select Sport+ with tion N within approx. 6 seconds. the Driving Dynamics Control. Position N is displayed in the instrument TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster. cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter lights up. stops. 2. Engage selector lever position S. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on and secure it against moving on its own. the brake. Steptronic Sport transmission: 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal Launch Control beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. The concept A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ Launch Control enables optimum acceleration ment cluster. on surfaces with good traction. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 75
Driving Controls
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again.
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 76
Controls Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 80 5 Engine oil temperature 80 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 7 Electronic displays 76 4 Tachometer 80 8 Reset miles 81
Electronic displays ▷ Selection lists, refer to page 85. ▷ Date, refer to page 81. ▷ External temperature, refer to page 81. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 82. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 65. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 74. ▷ On-board computer, refer to page 85. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 81.
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 77
Displays Controls
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to Red lights page 77. ▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to Safety belt reminder page 82. Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on ▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for the driver or passenger side is not Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ buckled. The safety belt reminder can cation. also be activated if objects are placed on the ▷ Range, refer to page 81. front passenger seat. ▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to Make sure that the safety belts are positioned page 120. correctly. ▷ Service requirements, refer to page 82. Airbag system ▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 84. ▷ Time, refer to page 81. Airbag system and belt tensioner are defective. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ Check Control ice center immediately.
The concept Parking brake, brake system The Check Control system monitors functions For additional information, refer to Re‐ in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions lease parking brake, refer to page 67. in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Front-end collision warning In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a Illuminated: advance warning is issued, text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ play. ger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Indicator/warning lights Increase distance. General information Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ another vehicle at a relatively high differential nations and colors. speed. Several of the lights are checked for proper Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ functioning and light up temporarily when the neuver. engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Pedestrian warning Symbol in the instrument cluster.
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 78
Controls Displays
If a collision with a person detected in this way For additional information, refer to Dynamic is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal Stability Control DSC, refer to page 118. sounds. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is Orange lights deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Active Cruise Control Dynamic Stability Control DSC is The number bars shows the selected switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ distance from the vehicle driving trol DTC is switched on. ahead. For additional information, refer to Dynamic For additional information, refer to Active Stability Control, refer to page 118, and Dy‐ Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, namic Traction Control, refer to page 119. refer to page 123.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐ tire inflation pressure in a tire. tected. Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐ tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ quate for operating the system. neuvers. The system was deactivated but applies the For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ brakes until you actively resume control by fer to page 103. pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Yellow lights Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure Anti-lock Braking System ABS in a tire. Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid ing force boost in some cases defec‐ sudden braking and steering maneuvers. tive. Stop carefully. Take into account Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no longer brake travel. Have this checked flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be by the service center immediately. detected. ▷ Interference through systems or devices DSC Dynamic Stability Control with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system Flashing: DSC controls the drive and automatically becomes active again. braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform profile to the driving circumstances. the reset of the system again. Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: checked by the service center. have the service center check it if needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 79
Displays Controls
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ Front fog lights tor, refer to page 99. Front fog lights are activated. For additional information, refer to Steering system Front fog lights, refer to page 94. Steering system in some cases defec‐ tive. High-beam Assistant Have the steering system checked by High-beam Assistant is switched on. the service center. High beams are activated and off auto‐ matically as a function of the traffic sit‐ Engine functions uation. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ For additional information, refer to High-beam ice center. Assistant, refer to page 93. For additional information, refer to On- board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 206. Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains Lane departure warning the speed that was set using the con‐ System is switched on and under cer‐ trol elements on the steering wheel. tain circumstances warns if a detected lane is left without flashing beforehand. Blue lights For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ ture warning, refer to page 113. High beams High beams are activated. Green lights For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 68. Turn signal
Turn signal on. General lamps Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb Check Control has failed. At least one Check Control message is For additional information, refer to Turn signal, displayed or is stored. The symbol is refer to page 67. shown in the display of the instrument cluster. Parking lights, headlight control Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ Text messages vated. Text messages in combination with a symbol For additional information, refer to in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator fer to page 91. and warning lights.
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 80
Controls Displays
Supplementary text messages They are stored and can be displayed Additional information, such as on the cause of again later. an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. Displaying stored Check Control messages With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" Symbols 2. "Vehicle status" Depending on the Check Control message, the 3. "Check Control" following functions can be selected. 4. Select the text message. ▷ "Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Messages after trip completion Check Control message in the Integrated Special messages displayed while driving are Owner's Manual. displayed again after the ignition is switched ▷ "Service request" off. Contact your service center. ▷ "Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance. Fuel gauge Vehicle tilt position may cause Hiding Check Control messages the display to vary. Depending on the equipment version, the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Tachometer Press the onboard computer button on the Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning turn signal lever. field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ rupted to protect the engine. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ Engine oil temperature eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at These messages can be faded for approx. the low temperature end. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ Drive at moderate engine played again automatically. and vehicle speeds. ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ automatically after approx. 20 seconds. ture: the pointer is in the
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 81
Displays Controls
middle or in the left half of Ice on roads the temperature display. Even at temperatures above ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of +37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy. the temperature range. A Check Control Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and message is also displayed. shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk of an accident.◀
Coolant temperature If the coolant along with the engine becomes Time too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. The time is displayed at the bot‐ Check the coolant level, refer to page 204. tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time for‐ mat, refer to page 88. Odometer and trip odometer
Display Date ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. The date is displayed in the ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. computer. Setting the date and date for‐ mat, refer to page 88.
Show/reset kilometers Range Press the knob. ▷ When the ignition is Display switched off, the time, the With a low remaining range: external temperature and the odometer are displayed. ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the on-board co‐ mupter. ▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking External temperature curves aggressively - engine operation If the indicator drops to might vary. +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal The Check Control message appears continu‐ sounds. ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. A Check Control message is displayed. Refuel promptly There is an increased risk of ice on roads. Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 82
Controls Displays
Displaying the cruising range Energy recovery Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the range can also be displayed as bar in the Display instrument cluster. The kinetic energy of the vehicle 1. "Settings" is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ 2. "Instrument cluster" tery is partially charged and fuel 3. "Additional indicators" consumption can be reduced.
Current fuel consumption Service requirements Instrument cluster The concept Displays the current fuel con‐ After the ignition is turned on the instrument sumption. Check whether you cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ are currently driving in an effi‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ cient and environmentally- nance. friendly manner. Your service specialist can read the current service requirements from your remote con‐ Instrum. cluster with enhanced trol. features Displays the current fuel con‐ Display sumption. Check whether you Data regarding the service status or legally are currently driving in an effi‐ mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cient and environmentally- cally transmitted to your service center before friendly manner. a service due date.
Displaying the current fuel Detailed information on service consumption requirements 1. "Settings" More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ 2. "Instrument cluster" play. 3. "Additional indicators" On the Control Display: The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion.
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 83
Displays Controls
Symbols Gear shift indicator
Sym‐ Description The concept bols The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ No service is currently required. cient gear for the current driving situation. Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tronic transmission and with manual tion is approaching. transmission. The service deadline has already Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ passed. played in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Symbol Description Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Fuel efficient gear is set. set correctly. On the Control Display: Shift up to fuel efficient gear. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Shift down to fuel efficient gear. 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" Shift into neutral. 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm. The entered date is stored. Steptronic transmission: displays
Automatic Service Request Example Description Data regarding the service status or legally Fuel efficient gear is set. mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date. Shift into fuel efficient gear. You can check when your service center was notified. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 84
Controls Displays
Speed limit detection Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. The concept Switching on/off Speed limit detection On the Control Display: Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently 1. "Settings" detected speed limit. The camera in the area of 2. "Instrument cluster" the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs 3. "Speed limit information" at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐ If speed limit detection is switched on, it can head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐ be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐ ment cluster via the computer. tected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation. Display The system takes into account the information The following is displayed in the instrument stored in the navigation system and also dis‐ cluster: plays speed limits present on routes without signs. Speed limit detection Current speed limit. Hints Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Speed limit detection is not The system assists the driver and does not re‐ available. place the human eye.◀
At a glance Speed limit detection can also be displayed in Camera the Head-up Display. System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. The camera is found near the interior rearview ▷ When driving toward bright lights. mirror.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 85
Displays Controls
▷ When the windshield behind the interior Display rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the list in the instrument cluster can differ from ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a the illustration shown. speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. Activating a list and adjusting the ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ setting ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the instrument cluster
The concept Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the On the right side of the steering wheel, turn steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐ the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding strument cluster and the Head-up Display: list. ▷ Current audio source. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ▷ Redial phone feature. ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. ▷ Turn on voice activation system. It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐ namics Control. On-board computer
Indication in the info display The information from the com‐ puter is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 86
Controls Displays
Calling up information on the info On the Control Display: display 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. Press the onboard computer button on the It is calculated based on your driving style over turn signal lever. the last 20 miles/30 km. Information is displayed in the info display of If there is only enough fuel left for less than the instrument cluster. 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.
Information at a glance Average fuel consumption Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn The average fuel consumption is calculated for signal lever calls up the following information in the period while the engine is running. the info display: The average fuel consumption is calculated for ▷ Range. the distance traveled since the last reset by the ▷ Average consumption, fuel. on-board comupter. ▷ Average consumption, fuel. Average speed ▷ Average speed. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the ▷ Date. engine manually stopped are not included in ▷ Speed limit detection. the calculation of the average speed. ▷ Time of arrival. When destination guidance is activated in Resetting average values the navigation system. Press and hold the onboard computer button ▷ Distance to destination. on the turn signal lever. When destination guidance is activated in Distance to destination the navigation system. The distance remaining to the destination is ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ gation system before the trip is started. Adjusting the info display The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment version, tomatically. you can select what information from the com‐ puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 87
Displays Controls
Time of arrival 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" The estimated time of arrival is 4. "Yes" displayed if a destination is en‐ tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. Sport displays The time must be correctly set. The concept On the Control Display, the current values for Speed limit detection performance and torque can be displayed if Description of the speed limit detection, refer the vehicle is appropriately equipped. to page 84, function. Displaying sport displays on the Trip computer Control Display The vehicle features two types of board com‐ 1. "Vehicle info" puters. 2. "Sport displays" ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an Speed warning overview of the current trip. The concept Resetting the trip computer Displays a speed, when reached, should cause On the Control Display: a warning to be issued. 1. "Vehicle info" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed once by at least 2. "Trip computer" 3 mph/5 km/h. 3. "Reset": all values are reset. "Automatically reset": all values are reset Displaying, setting or changing the approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a speed warning standstill. On the Control Display:
Display on the Control Display 1. "Settings" Display the computer or trip computer on the 2. "Speed" Control Display. 3. "Warning at:" 1. "Vehicle info" 4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed. 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" 5. Press the controller. Resetting the fuel consumption or Speed warning is stored. speed On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Onboard info"
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 88
Controls Displays
Activating/deactivating the speed 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ warning nutes are displayed. On the Control Display: 7. Press the controller. 1. "Settings" The time is stored. 2. "Speed" Setting the time format 3. "Warning" 1. "Settings" 4. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date" Setting your current speed as the 3. "Format:" speed warning 4. Select the desired format. On the Control Display: The time format is stored. 1. "Settings" Automatic time setting 2. "Speed" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, 3. "Select current speed" the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are 4. Press the controller. updated automatically. The current vehicle speed is stored as the 1. "Settings" speed warning. 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Auto time set" Settings on the Control Display Date Setting the date Time 1. "Settings" Setting the time zone 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Settings" 3. "Date:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is 3. "Time zone:" displayed. 4. Select the desired time zone. 5. Press the controller. The time zone is stored. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. Setting the time The date is stored. 1. "Settings" Setting the date format 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Settings" 3. "Time:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. 3. "Format:" 5. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored.
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 89
Displays Controls
Language Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display: Assist system information
1. "Settings" Display on the Control Display 2. "Language/Units" Information on the Assist system can be dis‐ 3. "Language:" played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐ 4. Select the desired language. play. Settings are stored for the profile currently in 1. "Settings" use. 2. "Control display" 3. "Driver assistance info" Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 28. Head-up Display
Units of measure The concept Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature:
1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. Settings are stored for the profile currently in This system projects important information use. into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. The driver can get information without averting Brightness his or her eyes from the road. Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display: Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up 1. "Settings" Display is influenced by the following factors: 2. "Control display" ▷ Certain sitting positions. 3. "Brightness" ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ play. ness is set. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. 5. Press the controller. ▷ Wet roads. Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. use.
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 90
Controls Displays
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ tings. ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ ally influenced using the instrument lighting. Switching on/off Settings are stored for the profile currently in 1. "Settings" use. 2. "Head-Up Display" Adjusting the height 3. "Head-Up Display" On the Control Display: Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" Overview 3. "Height" ▷ Speed. 4. Turn the controller. ▷ Navigation system. Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ Check Control messages. use. ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. ▷ Driver assistance systems. Setting the rotation Some of this information is only displayed On the Control Display: briefly as needed. 1. "Settings" Selecting displays in the Head-up 2. "Head-Up Display" Display 3. "Rotation" On the Control Display: 4. Turn the controller. 1. "Settings" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displayed information" Special windshield 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up The windshield is part of the system. Display. The shape of the windshield makes it possible Settings are stored for the profile currently in to display a precise image. use. A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ ages from being displayed. Setting the brightness Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ The brightness is automatically adjusted to the placed by a service center only. ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. On the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 91
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle features and options Parking lights/low beams, This chapter describes all standard, country- headlight control specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not General information necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Position of switch: , , the selected options or country versions. This If the driver door is opened with the ignition also applies to safety-related functions and switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ systems. The respectively applicable country cally switched off at these switch settings. provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Parking lights Position of switch : the vehicle's lights Overview light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the en‐ gine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page 92.
Low beams Position of switch with the ignition 1 Rear fog lights switched on: the low beams light up. 2 Front fog lights 3 Depending on the equipment: automatic Welcome lights headlight control, Adaptive Light Control, When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights, position or : parking and interior lights Daytime running lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked 4 Lights off, daytime running lights depending on the ambient brightness. 5 Parking lights, daytime running lights Activating/deactivating 6 Depending on the equipment: low beams, On the Control Display: welcome lights, High-beam Assistant 7 Instrument lighting 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome lights" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 92
Controls Lights
Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating The low beams stay lit for a short while if the In some countries, daytime running lights are headlight flasher is switched on after the radio- mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ ready state is switched off. vate the daytime running lights. On the Control Display: Setting the duration 1. "Settings" On the Control Display: 2. "Lighting" 1. "Settings" 3. "Daytime running lamps" 2. "Lighting" Settings are stored for the profile currently in 3. "Pathway lighting:" use. 4. Set length of time. Settings are stored for the profile currently in Roadside parking lights use.
Automatic headlight control Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐ vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever lights are activated. either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Personal responsibility The automatic headlight control cannot Switch off serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in ment in determining when to turn the lights on the opposite direction. in response to ambient lighting conditions. E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under Adaptive Light Control these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.◀ The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight Daytime running lights control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ tion of the road surface. ning lights light up in position , or Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ . After the ignition is switched off, the park‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows ing lights light up in position . the course of the road.
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 93
Lights Controls
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐ when turning, one of the two front fog lights is tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀ switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the inside of the curve is better lighted. Activating Activating Position of switch with the ignition switched on. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light When driving in reverse, the turning lights may switch into position or . be automatically switched on regardless of the 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐ steering angle. row.
Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ failed. Have the system checked as soon as tomatically brightened or dimmed. possible. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. High-beam Assistant The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ The concept ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend‐ When the low beams are activated, this system ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, automatically switches the high beams on and the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ off or suppresses the light in the areas that ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, trolled by a camera on the front of the interior the blue indicator light will stay on. rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams non and off as usual.
Note Personal responsibility The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ ment of when to use the high beams. There‐
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 94
Controls Lights
Switching the high beams on and off Fog lights manually Front fog lights The low beams must be switched on. Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 92, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. When the high beams or headlight flasher are ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. activated, the front fog lights are not switched on. The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ Instrument lighting ton on the turn signal lever. Adjusting System limits The parking lights or low beams The system is not fully functional in situations must be switched on to adjust such as the following, and driver intervention the brightness. may be necessary: Adjust the brightness with the ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, thumbwheel. such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or Interior lights ship traffic; and at animal crossings. General information ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights coming traffic on freeways. and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ cally. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ trols brightness of some of these features. ▷ At low speeds. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc.
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 95
Lights Controls
Overview Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness. 1 Interior lights 2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lights on and off Press button.
To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.
Reading lights Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights.
Ambient light Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Selecting color scheme On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select desired setting. With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they illuminate in the line's color when vehicle is unlocked.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 96
Controls Safety
Safety
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area. which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate restraint. Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 97
Safety Controls
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads The head airbag system is designed as an away from the side airbag and do not rest ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants might occur when airbag is activated. through side windows during rollovers or side ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. impact events. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ Knee airbag bag cover panels, do not cover them or The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal modify them in any way. impact. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. Protective action This also applies to steering wheel covers, Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end and the sides of the roofliner.◀ collisions. Even when you follow all instructions very Information on how to ensure the optimal closely, injury from contact with the airbags protective effect of the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the short-term and, in most cases, temporary steering wheel rim, holding your hands at hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ keep the risk of injury to your hands or ploying the airbags arms as low as possible when the airbag is Do not touch the individual components imme‐ triggered. diately after the system has been triggered; ▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ otherwise, you may risk burns. jects between an airbag and a person. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the front passenger side as a storage area. the service center or an authorized repair shop ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front for handling explosives. passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tach adhesive labels or coverings and do tem could lead to failure in an emergency or not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS unintentional activation of the airbag - both devices or' mobile phones. may lead to injury.◀ ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ Warnings and information on the airbags are ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and also found on the sun visors. legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated. Functional readiness of the airbag ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or system other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐ with integrated side airbags. ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐ ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 98
Controls Safety
erational readiness of the entire airbag system In this case, change the sitting position so that and the belt tensioner. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. Airbag system malfunctioning If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ or other items to the front passenger seat tem checked immediately. unless they are specifically recommended In case of a malfunction have airbag system by your vehicle's manufacturer. checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the that the system does not function as expected passenger seat if a child restraint system is in case of a severe accident.◀ to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that Automatic deactivation of the front- could press against the seat from below. seat passenger airbags ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ Indicator lamp for the front-seat sistance. passenger airbags Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ vated. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger air‐ bag might not be assured.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ passenger seat ger airbags indicates the operating state of the Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ front-seat passenger airbags. senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ structions for children on the front passenger ther activated or deactivated. seat, see Children.◀ ▷ The indicator lamp lights up Malfunction of the automatic when a child is properly deactivation system seated in a child restraint fix‐ When transporting older children and adults, ing system or when the seat the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ is empty. The airbags on the tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, front passenger side are not the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger activated. airbags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 99
Safety Controls
size is detected on the seat. The airbags Unobstructed area of movement on the front passenger side are activated. Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury Detected child seats or damage to objects.◀ The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM factured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat The concept passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the The system monitors tire inflation pressure in front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one Strength of the driver's and front-seat or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the passenger airbag tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature. The explosive power that activates driver's/ front passenger's airbags very much depends Hints on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ er's seat. Tire damage due to external factors With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Sudden tire damage caused by external trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ the accuracy of this function over the long- vance.◀ term. With use of the system observe further infor‐ mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ Calibrating the front seats fer to page 186. A corresponding message appears on the Control Display. Functional requirements 1. Press the reel and move the respective The system must have been reset with the seat all the way forward. correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is 2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still not assured. moves forward slightly. Reset the system after each adjustment of the 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. tire inflation pressure and after every tire or The calibration procedure is completed when wheel change. the message on the Control Display disap‐ Always use wheels with TPM electronics to pears. ensure that the system will operate properly. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration. Status display If the message does not disappear after a re‐ The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ soon as possible. play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 100
Controls Safety
2. "Vehicle status" On the Control Display and on the vehicle: 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" 1. "Vehicle info" The status is displayed. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" Status control display 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the 5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform Control Display. reset". 6. Drive away. All wheels green The tires are shown in gray and the status is System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ displayed. tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a the last reset. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The reset is One wheel is yellow completed automatically while driving. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in After a successfully completed Reset, the the indicated tire. wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) All wheels are yellow active" is displayed. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in You may interrupt this trip at any time. When several tires. you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Wheels, gray Low tire pressure message The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons The yellow warning lamp lights up. A for this may be: Check Control message is displayed. ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in ▷ Malfunction. tire inflation pressure. ▷ No reset was performed for the system. Status information The system therefore issues a warning The status control display additionally shows based on the tire inflation pressures before the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ the last reset. pending on the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. depending on driving style or weather condi‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ tions. vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with Carry out reset regular tires or run-flat tires. Reset the system after each adjustment of the Run-flat tires, refer to page 194, are la‐ tire inflation pressure and after every tire or beled with a circular symbol containing the wheel change. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 101
Safety Controls
Do not continue driving without run-flat 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at tires the next opportunity. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving is shown to be correct, it is possible that may result in serious accidents.◀ the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. In that case, carry out a reset. A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: Actions in the event of a flat tire The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ Normal tires ing style and road conditions. 1. Identify the damaged tire. A vehicle with an average load has a possible Do this by checking the air pressure in all driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. four tires. A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during tem, refer to page 194, can possibly be braking, a longer braking distance and different used for this purpose. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, is shown to be correct, it is possible that potholes, etc. the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. Then perform the reset. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the If an identification is not possible, please trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ contact the service center. ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ 2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Mobility System. Continued driving with a flat tire Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In Drive moderately and do not exceed a this case, have the electronics checked at the speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. next opportunity and have them replaced if Your car handles differently when you lose tire needed. inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are Run-flat tires longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀ Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce Continued driving with a flat tire speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: not continue driving and contact your service 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ center.◀ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 102
Controls Safety
Required tire inflation pressure check ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. message Reset the system again. A Check Control message is displayed in the ▷ Interference through systems or devices following situations with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ▷ The system has detected a wheel change, ing the area of the interference, the system but no reset was done. automatically becomes active again. ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to Declaration according to NHTSA/ specifications. FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring ▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below System the level of the last confirmation. Each tire, including the spare (if provided) In this case: should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ ▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as flated to the inflation pressure recommended needed. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle ▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your change. vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation System limits pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system does not function properly if a re‐ As an added safety feature, your vehicle has set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring reported though tire inflation pressures are system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ correct. sure telltale when one or more of your tires is The tire inflation pressure depends on the significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus should stop and check your tires as soon as increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ inflation pressure is reduced when the tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated temperature falls again. These circumstances tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to may cause a warning when temperatures fall tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ very sharply. ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please Malfunction note that the TPMS is not a substitute for The yellow warning lamp flashes and proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's then lights up continuously. A Check responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, Control message is displayed. No flat even if under-inflation has not reached the tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tected. tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ Display in the following situations: cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ have the service center check it if needed. tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one your service center. minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 103
Safety Controls
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ The status is displayed. function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to Initialization detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. When initializing the once set inflation tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of pressures serve as reference values in order to reasons, including the installation of replace‐ detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle firming the tire inflation pressures. that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ Do not initialize the system when driving with erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ snow chains. tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement On the Control Display: or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 1. "Vehicle info" to continue to function properly. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" FTM Flat Tire Monitor 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". The concept 6. Drive away. The system detects tire inflation pressure loss The initialization is completed while driving, on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ which can be interrupted at any time. tween the individual wheels while driving. The initialization automatically continues when In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the driving resumes. diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be detected and reported as a flat tire. Indication of a flat tire The system does not measure the actual infla‐ The yellow warning lamp lights up. A tion pressure in the tires. Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire Functional requirements inflation pressure. The system must have been initialized when 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ vers. sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with every tire or wheel change. regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 194, are la‐ Status display beled with a circular symbol containing the The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., Do not continue driving without run-flat whether or not the FTM is active. tires On the Control Display: Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 1. "Vehicle info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 104
Controls Safety
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ Run-flat tires bility Control is switched on if needed. Maximum speed System limits You may continue driving with a damaged tire Sudden tire damage at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Sudden serious tire damage caused by Continued driving with a flat tire external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.◀ If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, vers. check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. The system could be delayed or malfunction in 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the following situations: the next opportunity. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not surface. have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: ▷ When driving with snow chains. The possible driving distance after a loss of tire Actions in the event of a flat tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ ing style and road conditions. Normal tires A vehicle with an average load has a possible 1. Identify the damaged tire. driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. Do this by checking the air pressure in all A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ four tires. ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ self-steering properties. Adjust your driving tem, refer to page 194, can possibly be style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ used for this purpose. neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires potholes, etc. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not Because the possible driving distance de‐ have been initialized. In this case, initialize pends on how the vehicle is used during the the system. trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ If an identification is not possible, please ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ contact the service center. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. 2. Fix the flat tire where applicable using the Continued driving with a flat tire Mobility System, refer to page 194. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 105
Safety Controls
Your car handles differently when you lose tire Be alert inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ Due to system limitations, warnings may duced when braking, braking distances are be not issued at all, or may be issued late or longer and the self-steering properties will improperly. Therefore, always be alert and change.◀ ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving Tow-starting and towing can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce For tow-starting or towing, switch off the speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ could come loose and cause an accident. Do tions of the individual braking systems might not continue driving and contact your service lead to accidents.◀ center.◀ At a glance
Intelligent Safety Button in the vehicle
The concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐ tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐ sion. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button: Intelligent Safety button ▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to page 106. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 111. Camera
Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ The camera is found near the interior rearview Adapting your speed and driving style mirror. The displays and warnings of the system Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to terior rearview mirror clean and clear. adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 106
Controls Safety
Switching on/off General information The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ The system warns at two levels of an imminent cally active after every departure. danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with Press button: the systems are turned the current driving situation. off. The LED goes out. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to Press button: the systems are turned on. The 35 mph/60 km/h. LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display. Detection range
Front-end collision warning Depending on the equipment, the collision warning system consists of one of the two sys‐ tems: ▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ ing function, refer to page 106. ▷ Front-end collision warning with braking It responds to objects if they are detected by function, refer to page 108 the system.
Front-end collision warning Hints with City Braking function Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ The concept tute for the driver's personal judgment of the The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an traffic situation. accident cannot be prevented, the system will Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ help reduce the collision speed. cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed. Adapting your speed and driving style The automatic braking intervention is done The displays and warnings of the system with limited force and duration. do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the A camera in the area of the rearview mirror traffic conditions.◀ controls the system. The front-end collision warning is available Be alert even if cruise control has been deactivated. Due to system limitations, warnings may With the vehicle approaching another vehicle be not issued at all, or may be issued late or intentionally the collision warning is delayed improperly. Therefore, always be alert and avoiding false alarm. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 107
Safety Controls
Tow-starting and towing Switch off For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Press button: the system is switched Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ off. The LED goes out. tions of the individual braking systems might Re-press button: the system is switched on. lead to accidents.◀ The LED lights up.
At a glance Setting the warning time Button in the vehicle The warning time can be set via iDrive. 1. "Settings" 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Display. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use.
Warning with braking function
Intelligent Safety button Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ Camera nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Brake and increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. The camera is found near the interior rearview You are requested to intervene by mirror. braking or make an evasive maneu‐ Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ver. terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Prewarning Switching on/off This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance Switching on automatically to the vehicle ahead is too small. The system is automatically active after every The driver must intervene actively when there driving-off. is a prewarning.
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 108
Controls Safety
Acute warning with braking function ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach Warning of the imminent danger of a collision them at high speed. when the vehicle approaches another object at ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of a relatively high differential speed. you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. The driver must intervene actively when there ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ vention in a possible risk of collision. Functional limitations Acute warnings can also be triggered without The system may not be fully functional in the previous prewarning. following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ Braking intervention fall. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ In tight curves. to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment some braking intervention if there is risk of a version, the field of view of the camera in collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ come to a complete stop. scured. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may gine, via the Start/Stop knob. be shut down. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ The braking intervention is executed only if ately after vehicle shipment. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun vated. low in the sky. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ Warning sensitivity tively moving the steering wheel. The more sensitive the warning settings are, Object detection can be restricted. Limitations e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are of the detection range and functional restric‐ displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ tions are to be considered. cess of false warnings.
System limits Front-end collision warning Detection range with braking function The system's detection potential is limited. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The concept sued late. The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ accident cannot be prevented, the system will tected: help reduce the collision speed.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 109
Safety Controls
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ ently if needed. dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ The automatic braking intervention is executed Adapting your speed and driving style with limited braking force and for a brief period only. The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise adapt his or her driving speed and style to the Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision traffic conditions.◀ warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐ dar sensor. Be alert The front-end collision warning is available Due to system limitations, warnings may even if cruise control has been deactivated. be not issued at all, or may be issued late or With the vehicle approaching another vehicle improperly. Therefore, always be alert and intentionally the collision warning is delayed ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk avoiding false alarm. of an accident.◀
General information Tow-starting and towing The system issues a two-phase warning of a For tow-starting or towing, switch off the possible danger of collision with vehicles at Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of tions of the individual braking systems might warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐ lead to accidents.◀ uation. At a glance Detection range Button in the vehicle
It responds to objects if they are detected by the system. Intelligent Safety button
Hints Radar sensor Personal responsibility A radar sensor is located in the front bumper The system does not serve as a substi‐ for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the tute for the driver's personal judgment of the vehicle. traffic situation.
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 110
Controls Safety
Warning with braking function
Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ ing. tection of vehicles. Brake and increase distance.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ The vehicle flashes red and an move layers of snow and ice carefully. acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar ing. sensor. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ Switching on/off ver.
Switching on automatically Prewarning The system is automatically active after every driving-off. This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance Switch off to the vehicle ahead is too small. The driver must intervene actively when there Press button: the system is switched is a prewarning. off. The LED goes out. Re-press button: the system is switched on. Acute warning with braking function The LED lights up. Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at Setting the warning time a relatively high differential speed. The warning time can be set via iDrive. The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is 1. "Settings" assisted by an automatic braking intervention 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" in a possible risk of collision. 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Acute warnings can also be triggered without Display. previous prewarning. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. Braking intervention The detection of objects can be influenced by technical system limitations, e. g. pedestrians or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐ tion range and functional restrictions are to be considered.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 111
Safety Controls
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ fall. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ In tight curves. ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on ▷ If the driving stability control systems are the brake pedal. The system can assist with limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. automatic braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ ▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured. cle to a complete stop. Warning sensitivity Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may The more sensitive the warning settings are, be shut down. e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ The braking intervention is executed only if cess of false warnings. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. Pedestrian warning with city Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. braking function No automatic delay occurs. The concept The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐ tively moving the steering wheel. destrians. The system issues a warning in the city driving System limits speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking Detection range function. The system's detection potential is limited. The camera in the area of the rearview mirror Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ controls the system. sued late. General information E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐ sions with pedestrians at speeds from about ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h them at high speed. shortly before a collision the system supports ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you with a braking intervention. you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Under those circumstances it reacts to people ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. who are within the detection range of the sys‐ ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. tem. ▷ Pedestrians. ▷ Stationary objects.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 112
Controls Safety
Detection range Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within Intelligent Safety button the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. Camera Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ The camera is found near the interior rearview Adapting your speed and driving style mirror. The displays and warnings of the system Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to terior rearview mirror clean and clear. adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Switching on/off Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may Switching on automatically be not issued at all, or may be issued late or The system is automatically active after every improperly. Therefore, always be alert and driving-off. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 113
Safety Controls
Switch off System limits Press button: the systems are turned Detection range off. The LED goes out. The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ Press button: the systems are turned on. The ited. LED lights up. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. Warning with braking function E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ Display tected: If a collision with a person detected in this way ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. because of the viewing angle or contour. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. nal sounds. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may Braking intervention not be available in the following situations: The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ fall. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on ▷ In tight curves. the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ If the driving stability control systems are some braking intervention if there is risk of a deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front come to a complete stop. windshield are dirty or covered. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may gine, via the Start/Stop knob. be shut down. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ The braking intervention is executed only if ately after vehicle shipment. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun vated. low in the sky. The braking intervention can be interrupted by ▷ When it is dark outside. stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Limitations Lane departure warning of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered. The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 114
Controls Safety
speed, depending on the country version, is Camera between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system below this speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation. The system does not provide a warning if the The camera is found near the interior rearview turn signal is set before leaving the lane. mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ Hints terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute Switching on/off for the driver's personal judgment of the Press button. course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ▷ On: the LED lights up. ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ cle.◀ ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Settings are stored for the profile currently in At a glance use.
Button in the vehicle Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Lines: system is activated. ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. Lane departure warning If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning The warning ends: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 115
Safety Controls
▷ When using the turn signal. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐ med. System limits Before you change lanes after setting the turn The system may not be fully functional in the signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ following situations: uations described above. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ and the steering wheel vibrates. ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. Hints ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, Personal responsibility ice, dirt or water. The system does not serve as a substi‐ ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. tute for the driver's personal judgment of the ▷ When the lane markings are covered by traffic situation. objects. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ front of you. dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior At a glance rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Button in the vehicle ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Active Blind Spot Detection
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 116
Controls Safety
Radar sensors and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed The radar sensors are located under the rear much faster than your own. bumper. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. Switching on/off ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered Press button. with stickers. A Check Control message is displayed when ▷ On: the LED lights up. the system is not fully functional. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. For US owners only Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Display Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: Lamp in the exterior mirror housing FCC ID: ▷ NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may Information stage cause undesired operation. The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ Any unauthorized modifications or changes to ing indicates when there are vehicles in the these devices could void the user's authority to blind spot or approaching from behind. operate this equipment.
Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 117
Safety Controls
Brake force display After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of The concept alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ ior. ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break.
▷ During normal brake application, the outer Break recommendation brake lights light up. If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control brake lights light up in addition. Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed Attentiveness assistant only once during an uninterrupted trip. After a break, another recommendation to take The concept a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ mately 45 minutes. ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this System limits situation, it is recommended that the driver The function may be limited in the following takes a break. situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: Note ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. Personal responsibility ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below The system cannot act as a substitute for about 43 mph/70 km/h. the personal assessment of one's physical ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during state and may not detect an increasing lack of rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is changing lanes frequently. rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a ▷ When the road surface is poor. result.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Function The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within This chapter describes all standard, country- the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐ specific and optional features offered with the cle on a steady course by reducing engine series. It also describes features that are not speed and by applying brakes to the individual necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheels. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Note systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the Adjust your driving style to the situation respective features and systems. An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not Antilock Brake System ABS even with DSC. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety braking. margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ The vehicle contains its steering power even Do not deactivate DSC when driving with during full brake applications, thus increasing roof load active safety. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof- gine. mounted luggage rack. Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ ing-critical situation due to the elevated center Brake assistant of gravity.◀ When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible Overview braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Button in the vehicle This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The concept DSC OFF button DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating.
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 119
Driving stability control systems Controls
Indicator/warning lights The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ trols the drive and braking forces. what limited driving stability. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC failed. provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF curves. When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Therefore drive with appropriate caution. reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in curves. under the following special circumstances: To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads. Deactivating DSC ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds. Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Traction Control The DSC system is switched off. The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC Press button. OFF lights up. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Deactivating DTC Press button again. Indicator/warning lights TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ tor lamp go out. played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated. xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC DTC Dynamic Traction further optimize traction and driving dynamics. Control The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear The concept axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 120
Controls Driving stability control systems
Dynamic Damping Control Driving Dynamics Control
The concept The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine- tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. ous programs can be selected for this purpose. The system enhances driving dynamics and The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC comfort fitting road surface and driving style. OFF buttons can each be used to activate a program. Programs Overview The system offers several different programs. Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Button in the vehicle Control, refer to page 120.
SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+ Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving with limited driving stabilization. Operating the programs COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced control of the vehicle. Press button Program
DSC OFF Variable sport steering TRACTION The variable sport steering increases the SPORT+ steering angle of the front wheels at large SPORT steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or COMFORT when parking. Steering becomes more direct. ECO PRO It also varies the force required to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. Automatic program change This results in a sporty steering response. In addition, it becomes easier to steer during The system may automatically switch to COM‐ parking and maneuvering. FORT in the following situations: ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ TION or DSC OFF mode.
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 121
Driving stability control systems Controls
DSC OFF Activating SPORT When DSC OFF, refer to page 119, is active, Press button repeatedly until SPORT driving stability is limited during acceleration is displayed in the instrument cluster. and when driving in curves.
TRACTION Configuring SPORT When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has When the display is activated on the Control maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Display, refer to page 122, the SPORT driving Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 119, is mode can be set to individual specifications. activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ ▷ Activating SPORT. celeration and when driving in curves. ▷ "Configure SPORT" ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode. SPORT+ SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ Sporty driving with optimized suspension and vated: adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ bilization. 1. "Settings" Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. 2. "Driving mode" The driver handles several of the stabilization 3. "Configure SPORT" tasks. 4. Configure driving mode. This configuration is retrieved when the Activating SPORT+ SPORT driving mode is activated. Press button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the instrument cluster and COMFORT the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization. Automatic program change When activating cruise control, the program Activating COMFORT automatically switches to SPORT mode. Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument Indicator/warning lights cluster. SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. In certain situations, the system automatically The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: changes to the NORMAL program, automatic Dynamic Traction Control is activated. program change, refer to page 120.
ECO PRO SPORT ECO PRO, refer to page 173, provides consis‐ Depending on the equipment, consistently tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ engine control for greater driving agility with zation. maximum driving stabilization. Comfort functions and the engine controller The program can be configured to individual are adjusted. specifications. The configuration is stored for the profile currently in use.
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 122
Controls Driving stability control systems
The program can be configured to individual 3. "Driving mode info" specifications.
Activating ECO PRO Drive-off assistant Press button repeatedly until ECO This system supports driving off on inclines. PRO is displayed in the instrument The parking brake is not required. cluster. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. Configuring ECO PRO 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ 1. Activate ECO PRO. out delay. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is Make the desired settings. held in place for approx. 2 seconds. For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐ Configuring driving program sions, the possible holding duration amounts Settings can be made for the following driving to 2 minutes. programs in Driving mode: Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer ▷ SPORT, refer to page 121. is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. ▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 174. Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ Displays ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than Program selection approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to Pressing the button displays a roll back.◀ list of the selectable programs. Depending on your vehicle's op‐ tional features, the list in the in‐ Servotronic strument cluster can differ from the illustration shown. The concept The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐ Selected program quired to turn the wheels in accordance with The instrument cluster displays the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering the selected program. force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐ ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐ creases, the assistance of the steering force is reduced. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐ Display on the Control Display ing to the driving program, so that a direct, Program changes can be displayed on the sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐ Control Display. veyed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display"
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐ erates to the desired speed. This chapter describes all standard, country- The speed is also maintained downhill, but specific and optional features offered with the may not be maintained uphill if engine power is series. It also describes features that are not insufficient. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This General information also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Depending on the driving settings, the features provisions must be observed when using the of the cruise control can change in certain respective features and systems. areas.
Hints Active Cruise Control with Personal responsibility Stop & Go function, ACC Even an active system holds the driver responsible for his or her driving, particularly The concept for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed, Use this system to select a desired speed that keeping your distance and for your driving the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear style all in relation to traffic. roads. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot To the extent possible, the system automati‐ independently react to all traffic situations. cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe ahead of you. the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and The distance that the vehicle maintains to the react when needed, e.g. through braking, vehicle ahead of you can be varied. steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of accident.◀ For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ Unfavorable weather conditions tomatically reduces the speed, applies the In the event of unfavorable weather and brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, cle ahead begins moving faster. slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and recognition of vehicles as well as short-term then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐ riod, the system is able to detect this within the tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐ given system limits. Your own vehicle will rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when brake automatically and then accelerate again. necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐ risk of an accident.◀ celerator pedal or press the appropriate button to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐ matically accelerate.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against moving on its own. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐ wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ tection of vehicles. Press but‐ Function ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ ton move layers of snow and ice carefully. System on/off, interrupt, refer ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar to page 124 sensor. Store, maintain speed, refer to Switching on/off and interrupting page 125 cruise control Resume speed, refer to page 126 Switching on
Reduce distance, refer to Press button on the steering wheel. page 126 The indicator lights in the instrument cluster Increase distance, refer to light up and the mark in the speedometer is set page 126 to the current speed. rocker switch: Cruise control can be used. Maintain, store, change speed, refer to page 125 Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's With deactivated or interrupted system series, optional features and country specifica‐ use your brakes, steering and moves as usual tions. to avoid the chance of an accident.◀
Radar sensor To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the Press button. vehicle. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
Interrupting Maintaining/storing the speed When active, press the button. Press button. Or: If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the brakes are applied. ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ gaged. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving terrupted. Dynamics Control. When the system is switched on, the current ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are speed is maintained and stored as the desired opened while the vehicle is standing still. speed. ▷ If the system has not detected objects for This is displayed in the speedometer and an extended period, e.g., on a road with briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the very little traffic without curb or shoulder instrument cluster, refer to page 126. markings. When cruise control is maintained or stored, ▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog. on if needed.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the Changing the speed speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. Hints If active, the displayed speed is stored and the Adjusting the desired speed vehicle reaches the stored speed when the Modify desired speed to road conditions road is clear. and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to there is the risk of an accident.◀ the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. Differences in speed 1 mph/1 km/h. Large differences in speed relative to ve‐ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐ past the point of resistance, the desired sated by the system for example in the follow‐ speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ ing situations: mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the vehicle. action. ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.◀
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
Distance To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, press the accelerator or press Select a distance the RES or SET button. Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ Rolling bars in the distance display indicate fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐ the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed sor has driven off. safety distance.◀ Your vehicle was brought down to a halt through stepping on the brake pedal and it is Reduce distance standing behind another vehicle: Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. 1. Press button to call up a stored Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ desired speed. tance, refer to page 126. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the Increase distance RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead Press button repeatedly until the de‐ of you drives away. sired distance is set. Displays in the instrument cluster Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ tance, refer to page 126. Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: Calling up the desired speed and the system is active. distance ▷ The marking lights up or‐ While driving ange: the system has been interrupted. Press button with the system ▷ The marking does not light up: the system switched on. is switched off. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: Brief status display ▷ When the system is switched off. Selected desired speed. ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing If --- appears briefly on the display for Check The system brought the vehicle to a complete Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ standstill: tem requirements are currently not ready for operations. ▷ Green marking in the speedometer: Your vehicle accelerates automatically as Distance to vehicle ahead of you soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ dar sensor moves off. ing ahead of you. ▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐ tomatic driving off.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
Distance display The conditions are not adequate for the sys‐ tem to work. Distance 1 The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator Distance 2 pedal.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an Distance 3 acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on. Displays in the Head-up Display Some system information can also be dis‐ The system has been interrupted or played in the Head-up Display. distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator System limits pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Speed range Distance control is temporarily sup‐ The system is best used on well-constructed pressed because the accelerator roads. pedal is being pressed; a vehicle The minimum speed that can be set is was detected. 20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven can be set depends on the vehicle. away. The system can also be activated when sta‐ ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate tionary. further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ uation when using the system. ton or rocker switch. Detection range Indicator/warning lights Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lights do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The detection lidacity of the system and the automatic braking lidacity are limited. The vehicle symbol flashes orange: Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected.
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
Limited detection potential tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ Because of the limited possible detec‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., tion, you should be alert at all times so that you when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, risk of an accident.◀ the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐ Deceleration wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, Unexpected lane change e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users. ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Stationary objects. ▷ Cross traffic. ▷ Oncoming traffic. If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves No warnings into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ A warning may not be issued when ap‐ cle, you yourself must react, as the system proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ does not react to stopped vehicles. stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Cornering
Swerving vehicles
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive until it is completely within the same lane as into a curve at an appropriate speed. your vehicle. In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you might Swerving vehicles be detected late or not at all. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, e.g. When you approach a curve the system may A Check Control message is displayed if the briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to system fails. the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ ating. Cruise control After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐ activated and controls speed independently. The concept The system maintains a preset speed via the Driving away buttons on the steering wheel. The system In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking automatically; for example: is insufficient.
▷ On steep inclines. General information ▷ From behind bumps in the road. Depending on the driving settings, the features In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Radar sensor Hints For US owners only Unfavorable conditions The transmitter and receiver units comply with Do not use the system if unfavorable part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ stant speed, e.g.: erned by the following: ▷ On winding roads. FCC ID: ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ OAYARS3-A ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or Compliance statement: on a loose road surface. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ Rules. Operation is subject to the following cle and cause an accident.◀ two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
Overview ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ Buttons on the steering wheel gaged. ▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ Press button Function rent speed. System on/off, interrupt ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Store speed or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. Resume speed ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. rocker switch: change, hold, store speed Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed
Controls Hints
Switching on Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions Press button on the steering wheel. and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Maintaining/storing the speed Cruise control can be used. Press button. Switch off Or: Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀
Press button.
▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ is deleted. terrupted.
Interrupting When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired When active, press the button. speed. This is displayed, refer to page 131, in the The system is automatically interrupted if: speedometer and briefly in the instrument ▷ The brakes are applied. cluster.
130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
When cruise control is maintained or stored, Desired speed DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned ▷ The marking lights up green: on if needed. the system is active. Changing the speed ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly interrupted. until the desired speed is set. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system If active, the displayed speed is stored and the is switched off. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to Brief status display the point of resistance, the desired speed Selected desired speed. increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed If --- appears briefly on the display for Check past the point of resistance, the desired Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. operations. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ Displays in the Head-up Display pends on the vehicle. Some system information can also be dis‐ ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ played in the Head-up Display. ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. PDC Park Distance Control After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the The concept switch beyond the resistance point causes PDC is a support when parking. When you the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ Resuming the desired speed ble - then the object is reported through: Press button. ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. The stored speed is reached and maintained. General information Displays in the instrument cluster Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure Indicator lamp the distances from objects. The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ 6 ft/2 m. ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on. An acoustic warning is first given: ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. Switching on/off 5 ft/1.50 m. To ensure full functionality: Switching on automatically ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ bicycle racks. tion P R. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. Automatic deactivation during forward ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not travel spray the sensors for long periods and The system switches off when a certain driving maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. distance or speed is exceeded. Hints Switch the system back on if needed. Personal responsibility With front PDC: switching on/off Even an active system does not relieve manually the driver from personal responsibility while Press button. driving. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot ▷ On: the LED lights up. independently react to all traffic situations. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and Display react when needed - risk of accident.◀
Avoid driving fast with PDC Signal tones Avoid approaching an object too fast. When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐ if an object is detected to the left rear of the tive. vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear For technical reasons, the system may other‐ speaker. wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. Overview If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is With front PDC: button in vehicle sounded. With front PDC: if objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.
Volume The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐ PDC Park Distance Control justed similar to the sound and volume set‐ tings of the radio.
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. use. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before Visual warning or after a continuous tone sounds. The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that False warnings are farther away are already displayed on the PDC may issue a warning under the following Control Display before a signal sounds. conditions even though there is no obstacle A display appears as soon as Park Distance within the detection range: Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ In heavy rain. The range of the sensors is represented in the ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered colors green, yellow and red. with ice. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. played, the reel can be made to PDC: ▷ On rough road surfaces. "Rear view camera" ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. System limits ▷ In large buildings with right angles and Limits of ultrasonic measurement smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ rages. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Through heavy pollution. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., coats. sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ machines. ous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ aged or out of position. ger present, the system is again fully func‐ ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as tional. high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. Malfunction ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other A Check Control message is displayed. vehicles. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. area on the Control Display. ▷ With moving objects. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To ensure full functionality: ledges or cargo. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐ ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure sors. such as fences.
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not At a glance spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Button in the vehicle
Surround View
The concept Surround View comprises various camera as‐ sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 134 Rearview camera ▷ Side View, refer to page 136. ▷ Top View, refer to page 137. Camera
Rearview camera
The concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Hints The camera lens is located in the handle of the Check the traffic situation as well tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ Clean the camera lens, refer to page 225. dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ Switching on/off
Switching on automatically With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R. The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
Switching on/off manually ▷ They help you to estimate how much space is needed when parking and maneu‐ Press button. vering on level pavement. ▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ ▷ On: the LED lights up. ing angle and are continuously adjusted to ▷ Off: the LED goes out. the steering wheel movements. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Turning circle lines Switching the view via iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. ▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐ posed on the rearview camera image to‐ Activating assistance functions gether with pathway lines. More than one assistance function can be ac‐ ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ tive at the same time. sible turning radius on a level road. ▷ Parking aid lines ▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ "Parking aid lines" ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ tain angle. Lanes and turning radius are indicated. ▷ Obstacle marking Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐ ▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the tance to the object shown. image of the rearview camera.
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
Parking using pathway and turning System limits radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ Detection of objects dius lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 131. The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line. Side View
The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Display settings Hints The images from both cameras are shown si‐ Brightness multaneously on the Control Display. With the rearview camera switched on: Check the traffic situation as well 1. Select the symbol. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting hicle on blind driveways and intersections with is reached, and press the controller. your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out‐ Contrast side the picture area of the Side View cam‐ eras.◀ With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
At a glance Switch the system back on if needed.
Button in the vehicle Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.
Side View
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show Cameras the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness With the Side View switched on: 1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ With the Side View switched on: ture the image. 1. "Contrast" The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 225. System limits The cameras lidture a maximum range of Switching on/off 330 ft/100 m.
Switching on/off manually Press button. Top View The concept Automatic deactivation during forward Top View provides assistance in parking and travel maneuvering. The area around the doors and The system switches off when a certain driving the road area around the vehicle are shown on distance or speed is exceeded. the Control Display for this purpose.
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
General information Cameras The image is lidtured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the rearview camera. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.
Hints The lenses of the Top View camera are located Check the traffic situation as well at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐ Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ age quality may be impaired by dirt. hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 225. dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ Switching on/off Overview Switching on automatically Button in the vehicle With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed. Top View Switching on/off manually Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed.
Display
Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display.
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
When the distance to an object is small, a red track line is continuously adjusted for the bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in steering wheel movement. the PDC display. "Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations: ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the trunk lid open. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. The display appears as soon as Top View is ▷ In poor light. activated. A Check Control message is displayed in some When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ of these situations. played, it is possible to reel to top view: "Rear view camera" Parking assistant Brightness The concept With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ is reached, and press the controller. lel to the road. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces Displaying the turning radius and on both sides of the vehicle. pathway lines The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ ▷ The static, red turning radius line shows sible parking line and takes control of steering the space needed to the side of the vehicle during the parking procedure. when the steering wheel is turned all the way. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ view camera and react accordingly. tually needed to the side of the vehicle. A component of the parking assistant is the The lane line depends on the engaged PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 131. gear and the current steering angle. The
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
Hints ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve Suitable parking space the driver from personal responsibility while ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum driving. length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: independently react to all traffic situations. your vehicle's length plus approx. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe 4 ft/1.2 m. the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. react when needed - risk of accident.◀
Changes to the parking space Regarding the parking procedure Changes to the parking space after it was ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed. measured are not taken into account by the ▷ Parking brake released. system. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ driver's side, the corresponding turn signal vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ must be set where applicable. dent.◀ Overview Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter Button in the vehicle of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀
Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curb if need be. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ Parking assistant vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀ An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
Ultrasound sensors Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.
The system is activated. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. System status To ensure full functionality: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Switching on/off ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side Switching on with the button of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant Press button. is activated and search for parking space The LED lights up. active. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking The current status of the parking space search spaces at the edge of the road next to the is indicated on the Control Display. vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant Parking assistant is activated automatically. is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ lighted. Switching on with the reverse gear ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ Shift into reverse. tive. Steering control has The current status of the parking space search been taken over by system. is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant" ▷ Parking space search is always active Switch off whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ The system can be deactivated as follows: activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ Press button. the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. ▷ Switch off the ignition.
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
Parking using the parking assistant ▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. Check the traffic situation as well ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐ overcome, such as curbs. hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and PDC's signals. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays ger of an accident.◀ clearances that are too small. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ or the time taken for parking is exceeded. vate it if needed. ▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary The status of the parking space search is to the desired side for parking. indicated on the Control Display. ▷ When switching to another function on the 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ Control Display. play. A Check Control message is displayed. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary Resume vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move. An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ tinued if needed. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this. 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if needed. System limits Interrupting manually No parking assistance The parking assistant can be interrupted at any The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ time: tance in the following situations: ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol ▷ In tight curves. on the Control Display. ▷ Press button. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the Interrupting automatically following situations: ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel The system is interrupted automatically in the roads. following situations: ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the the instruction on the Control Display. parking space. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 144
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 52 6 Temperature 2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 52 3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode 5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
Hints the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 145
Climate control Controls
Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 145, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Manual air distribution gram. Turn the wheel to select the de‐ Temperature sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.
▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. The automatic climate control reaches this ▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ temperature as quickly as possible, if needed well. by increasing the cooling or heating output, ▷ Footwell. and then keeps it constant. Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ Defrosts windows and removes perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ condensation mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ just the set temperature. crease the air flow and temperature, and, if needed, use the cooling function. Cooling function The car's interior can only be cooled with the Rear window defroster engine running. Press button. Press button. The rear window defroster switches The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ off automatically after a certain period of time. fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again. Air flow, manual Depending on the weather, the windshield and Press the left or right side of the but‐ side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. gine is started. The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ The cooling function is switched on automati‐ duced automatically to save battery power. cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, AUTO program condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐ Press button. ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ Recirculated-air mode ture are controlled automatically. You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ Depending on the selected temperature and tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ outside influences, the air is directed to the rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The windshield, side windows, upper body, and system then recirculates the air currently into the footwell. within the vehicle.
145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 146
Controls Climate control
Press button repeatedly to select an Switching the system on/off operating mode: Switch off ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Press the left button for the minimum ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply speed. of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Switching on cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ Press any button except tain amount of time in order to avoid window ▷ Rear window defroster. fogging. ▷ Seat heating. If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if Microfilter needed. In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ Sufficient ventilation crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ This filter should be replaced during scheduled tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ maintenance, refer to page 205, of your vehi‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ cle. culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 52 2 Temperature, left
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 147
Climate control Controls
3 AUTO program 10 Air distribution, right 4 Display 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 5 Maximum cooling 12 Air distribution, left 6 Temperature, right 13 Rear window defroster 7 Seat heating, right 52 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep 8 Cooling function clear 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ 15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐ lated-air mode tion
Hints Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ Sufficient ventilation ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ windows, upper body, and into the footwell. tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ The cooling function, refer to page 148, is nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in gram. the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible. Climate control functions in detail Intensity of the AUTO program Temperature With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ Turn the ring to set the desired matic intensity control can be changed. temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity.
The automatic climate control reaches this The selected intensity is shown on the display temperature as quickly as possible, if needed of the automatic climate control. by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant. Maximum cooling Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ Press button. perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ The system is set to the lowest tem‐ just the set temperature. perature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode. AUTO program Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ Press button. gion. The vents need to be open for this. Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ The function is available above an external ture are controlled automatically. temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running. Adjust air flow with the program active.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 148
Controls Climate control
Cooling function Sufficient ventilation The car's interior can only be cooled with the When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ engine running. tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ Press button. culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ dow condensation increases.◀ ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Manual air distribution side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ Press button repeatedly to select a gine is started. program: The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. ▷ Upper body region. When using the automatic climate control, ▷ Upper body region and footwell. condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐ ▷ Footwell. ops that exits underneath the vehicle. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: Automatic recirculated-air control/ driver's side only. recirculated-air mode If the windows are fogged over, press the You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ sor. rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently Air flow, manual within the vehicle. To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ Press button repeatedly to select an gram first. operating mode: Press the left or right side of the but‐ ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ton: decrease or increase air flow. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The selected air flow is shown on the display of control: a sensor detects pollutants in the the automatic climate control. outside air and shuts off automatically. The air flow of the automatic climate control ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the may be reduced automatically to save battery supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ power. manently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Rear window defroster cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window Press button. fogging. The rear window defroster switches If the windows are fogged over, switch off the off automatically after a certain period of time. recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 149
Climate control Controls
Defrosts windows and removes Ventilation condensation Press button. Front ventilation Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. For this purpose, point the side vents onto the side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, sor. arrow 1. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the Switching the system on/off vents continuously, arrows 2. ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in Switch off the upper body region, arrow 3. Press the left button for the minimum Toward blue: colder. speed. Toward red: warmer. The set interior temperature for the driver Switching on and passenger are not changed. Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. Adjusting the ventilation ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's interior is too hot. In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, ▷ Draft-free ventilation: pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 205, of your vehi‐ cle.
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 150
Controls Climate control
Ventilation in the rear Preselecting the reel-on time On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.
Activating the reel-on time On the Control Display: ▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1. 1. "Settings" ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ 2. "Climate" row 2. 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" Toward blue: colder. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ Toward red: warmer. trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐ vated. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the Parked-car ventilation next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated. The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ cle interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us‐ ing two preset reel-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly On the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comf. ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on.
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 151
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door the selected options or country versions. This opener. also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact: systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Your service center. provisions must be observed when using the ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. respective features and systems. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Universal Integrated Remote Control Control elements on the interior rearview mirror The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required ▷ LED, arrow 1. in order to program the remote control. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. During programming ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ During programming and before activat‐ quired for programming. ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ Programming trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury or damage. General information Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- 1. Switch on the ignition. held transmitter.◀ 2. Initial setup: Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored Press and hold the left and right button on functions for the sake of security. the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 152
Controls Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds. rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system, pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized. of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system. med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person. gin flashing slowly. To synchronize: 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system. rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described. least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately 15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐ down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐ and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out. hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Reprogramming individual buttons 6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed. rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter. ing-code system. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 153
Interior equipment Controls
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Digital compass the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can Overview then be controlled by the button on the in‐ terior rearview mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button and repeatedly press and release the 2 Mirror display hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Mirror display Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the Before operation mirror when driving straight. Before operating a system using the uni‐ Operating concept versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the Various functions can be called up by pressing range of movement of the remote-controlled the control button with a pointed object, such system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. damage. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- trol button is pressed: held transmitter.◀ ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. The system, such as the garage door, can be ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering the button within receiving range of the system setting. until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ Deleting stored functions cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ Press and hold the left and right button on the fer to World map with compass zones. interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 154
Controls Interior equipment
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle. trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ 10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass. Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or ▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory. ▷ The point of the compass displayed does Setting the language not change despite changing the direction of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ button again to reel between English "E" and played. German "O".
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 155
Interior equipment Controls
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ Replace the cover after use mately 10 seconds. Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Sun visor
Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter Push in the lighter. Ashtray The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. Opening
Connecting electrical devices
Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle
Raise cover. Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an Emptying increased power consumption.◀ Take out the insert. Replace the cover after use Lighter Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter Danger of burns socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of getting burned. Sockets Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so General information that children cannot use the lighter and burn The lighter socket can be used as a socket for themselves.◀ electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on.
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 156
Controls Interior equipment
Note In the trunk The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.
Front center console
The socket is located on the left side in the trunk.
USB interface for data transfer Raise the lid and remove the cover or cigarette lighter. The concept Connection for importing and exporting data Rear center console on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35. ▷ Music collection. ▷ Importing Trips.
Hints Observe the following when connecting: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. Remove the cover. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐ ing external devices.
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 157
Interior equipment Controls
Without telephone: overview Hints Danger of jamming Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐ jury or damage may result.◀
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ Ensuring the stability of the child seat partment. When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and With telephone: overview headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀
Opening 1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ area to release the rear seat backrest. rest.
Through-loading system
The concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. If equipped with through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20– 40. The sides can be folded down separately or to‐ gether.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 158
Controls Interior equipment
2. The unlocked backrest moves forward slightly.
3. Fold backrest forward.
Closing Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it. Ensure that the lock is securely engaged Make sure that the lock engages prop‐ erly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the car's interior during brak‐ ing or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle's occupants.◀ To secure cargo, refer to page 170, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull the middle sec‐ tion forward.
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 159
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 160. This chapter describes all standard, country- ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to console, refer to page 161. the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Storage compartment between the rear also applies to safety-related functions and seats, refer to page 161. systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Glove compartment
Front passenger side Hints Note No loose objects in the car's interior Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ Close the glove compartment again im‐ rior without securing them; otherwise, they mediately may present a danger to occupants e.g., during Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ braking and evasive maneuvers.◀ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Opening Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀
Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 159. Pull the handle. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, The light in the glove compartment switches refer to page 160. on. ▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage compartment, in front of the cupholders, Closing refer to page 160. Fold cover closed. ▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 160.
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 160
Controls Storage compartments
Locking Front storage compartment The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 41, e.g. This prevents access to the glove compart‐ ment and to the trunk. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side Raise the lid to open it.
Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ Compartments in the doors mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ Do not stow any breakable objects ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. cur during accidents.◀ glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ Opening cident.◀
Center armrest
Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.
Opening Pull the handle.
Closing Fold cover closed.
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions.
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 161
Storage compartments Controls
Connection for an external audio Front device An external audio device, e.g., an MP3 player, can be con‐ nected via the AUX-IN port or the USB audio interface in the center armrest.
Storage compartment in the rear Rear A storage compartment is located in the center In the center armrest. armrest.
Storage compartment between the rear seats There is a storage compartment between the rear seats.
Cupholders Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. Hints To close: push both covers back in, one after Shatter-proof containers and no hot the other. drinks Pushing back the covers Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is Push back the covers before folding up the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in Clothes hooks damage.◀ Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's view.◀
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 162
Controls Storage compartments
No heavy objects The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to Do not hang heavy objects from the a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg. hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ Lightweight objects only neuvers.◀ Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐ ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.◀
Retaining strap A retaining strap is available on the right side trim for fastening small objects. Press on the top edge to fold open. Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 170, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Storage compartments in the cargo area Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the Storage compartment load, refer to page 170, and to store small A storage compartment is located on the left parts. side. Located on the right side is a storage compart‐ Storage compartment under the cargo ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to floor panel page 207, and first aid kit, refer to page 217. Maximum load To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not Net exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/ Small objects can be stowed in the net on the 20 kg in the storage compartment under the left side. cargo floor panel.◀
Multi-function hook
Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch at top, if needed, arrow 2. A multi-function hook is located on each side of the trunk.
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 163
Storage compartments Controls
Partitioning the compartment The compartment can be divided using an at‐ tachable partition.
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 166
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. This chapter describes all standard, country- Drive conservatively for the first specific and optional features offered with the 200 miles/300 km. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Brake system the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ systems. The respectively applicable country prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐ provisions must be observed when using the formance between brake discs and brake respective features and systems. pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐ riod.
Breaking-in period Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal General information level only after a distance driven of approx. Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, other (break-in time). engage the clutch gently. The following instructions will help accomplish Following part replacement a long vehicle life and good efficiency. The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ served if any of the components above-men‐ trol, refer to page 74. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km General driving notes Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: Closing the trunk lid ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and Drive with the trunk lid closed 100 mph/160 km/h. Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and stances. evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐ fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be From 1,200 miles/2,000 km damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be ter the vehicle interior.◀ increased. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be Tires avoided: Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. ▷ Drive moderately.
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 167
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system Driving through water Hot exhaust system Observe water level and speed High temperatures are generated in the Do not exceed the maximum water level exhaust system. and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's Do not remove the heat shields installed and engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐ never apply undercoating to them. Make sure mission may be damaged.◀ that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, Drive though calm water only and only if it is grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ height, no faster than walking speed, up to sition mode, or when parked. Such contact 3 mph/5 km/h. could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ Braking safely erty damage. Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, ard feature. there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed. Mobile communication devices in the Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid vehicle any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ fort. hicle Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from It is not recommended to use mobile phones, the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior active mode. without a direct connection to an external aer‐ In certain braking situations, the perforated ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and brake discs can cause functional problems. mobile communication devices can interfere However, this has no effect on the perform‐ with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake. ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐ Objects within the range of movement cle interior.◀ of the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Hydroplaning Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other Hydroplaning objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ function of the pedals could be impeded while duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ driving and create the risk of an accident. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can Do not place additional floor mats over existing form between the tires and road surface. mats or other objects. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ Only use floor mats that have been approved ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete for the vehicle and can be properly attached to loss of contact between the tires and the road floor. surface, ultimately undermining your ability to Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ steer and brake the vehicle. tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 168
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Driving in wet conditions Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ press brake pedal ever so gently every few sponse - generally that cannot be corrected. miles. Condensation under the parked Ensure that this action does not endanger vehicle other traffic. When using the automatic climate control, The heat generated in this process helps dry condensation water develops collecting under‐ the brake discs and pads. neath the vehicle. In this way braking efficiency will be available These traces of water under the vehicle are when you need it. normal. Hills Avoid stressing the brakes Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀ Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐ wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.
Brake disc corrosion Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the brake pads are favored by: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 169
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
2. Determine the combined weight of the Hints driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Overloading the vehicle 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ and passengers from XXX kilograms or pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. YYY pounds. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available side the tires. This could result in a sudden amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals No fluids in the cargo area 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs Make sure that fluids do not leak into the passengers in your vehicle, the amount of cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity aged.◀ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. Heavy and hard objects 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ Do not stow any heavy and hard objects gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ calculated in Step 4. vers.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 170
Driving tips Loading
Load Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the trunk
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are four lashing less cargo that can be transported. eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to secure cargo and store small parts. ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the trunk ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of floor. the backrests. Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described; otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps. Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 171
Loading Driving tips
Roof-mounted luggage rack ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid. Note ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ Roof racks are available as special accessories. ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward.
Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps.
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 172
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to thereby reduces the range. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Tires provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various General information ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐ sumption. Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Check the tire inflation pressure sions. regularly Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip. erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and ronmental impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold following use engine up to operating temperature. Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following Look well ahead when use. driving Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 173
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ Switch off any functions that ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When are not currently needed accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ gine speeds. Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and When you reach the desired speed, shift into reduce the range, especially in city and stop- the highest applicable gear and drive with the and-go traffic. engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ stant speed. Reel off these functions if they are not needed. If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of The ECO PRO driving program supports the the vehicle, refer to page 83. energy conserving use of comfort features. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. Use coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot Have maintenance carried off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. out For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve erator and let the vehicle roll. optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. your service center. Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer Switch off the engine during to page 205. longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., ECO PRO at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves Auto Start/Stop function on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐ automatically switches off the engine during a mate control output, are adjusted. stop. Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ If the engine is switched off and then restarted matically decoupled from the transmission in rather than leaving the engine running con‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position onds of switching off the engine. D remains engaged. In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ In addition, context-sensitive instructions are mined by other factors, such as driving style, displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 174
Driving tips Saving fuel
The achieved extended range is displayed in ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": the instrument cluster as bonus range. The output is reduced once the set ECO PRO speed is reached. Overview The system includes the following Coasting EfficientDynamics functions and displays: Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 174. ing the engine and Coasting, refer to ▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 176, with the engine idling. page 175 This function is only available in ECO PRO ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to mode. page 174. ECO PRO climate control ▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to page 176. "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. page 177. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or Activate ECO PRO cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption can be economized. Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument The mirror heating is made available when out‐ cluster. side temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential Configuring ECO PRO Shows potential savings with the current set‐ Via the Driving Dynamics Control tings in percentages. 1. Activate ECO PRO. Display in the instrument cluster 2. "Configure ECO PRO" 3. Configure the program. ECO PRO bonus range An adjusted driving style helps Via the iDrive you extend your driving range. 1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the 2. "ECO PRO mode" bonus range in the instrument Or cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. 1. "Settings" The bonus range is automatically reset every 2. "Driving mode" time the vehicle is refueled. 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip ▷ "Tip at:": Adjust the ECO PRO speed.
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 175
Saving fuel Driving tips
Efficiency display ECO PRO tip, driving tip
Display in the instrument cluster The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.
Note The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
Display in the instrument cluster with extended 1. "Settings" range 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed. Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐ celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ low time to assess road conditions. A mark in the efficiency display informs about the current driving style. Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ ergy recovered by coasting or when braking. Steptronic transmission: shift from Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ M/S to D. celerating. Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the Steptronic transmission/manual bar's color: transmission: follow shifting instruc‐ ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long tions. as the mark moves within the blue range. Manual transmission: engage neu‐ ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by tral for engine stop. backing off the accelerator pedal. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met.
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 176
Driving tips Saving fuel
Indications on the Control Display Coasting
EfficientDynamics The concept Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ The system helps to conserve fuel. ogy can be displayed while driving. To do this, under certain conditions the engine 1. "Vehicle info" is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ sion when selector lever position D is set. The 2. "EfficientDynamics" vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector Displaying fuel consumption history lever position D remains engaged. The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ played within an adjustable time frame. ing. Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐ lected time frame. tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled Trip interruptions are represented below the again. bar on the time axis. "Consumption history" Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ Adjusting fuel consumption history fer to page 173, driving mode. time frame Coasting is automatically activated when ECO Select the symbol. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. Resetting fuel consumption history The function is available in a certain speed 1. Open "Options". range. 2. "Reset consumption history" A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup‐ Displaying EfficientDynamics info ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting. The current efficiency can be displayed. "EfficientDynamics info" Safety mode The following systems are displayed: The function is not available under one of the following conditions. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on ▷ Climate control output. steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ Display ECO PRO tips sive current. "ECO PRO Tips" ▷ Cruise control activated. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 177
Saving fuel Driving tips
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if Indications on the Control Display the following conditions are met: The Coasting driving condition is displayed in ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode operated. is active. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ The distance traveled in the Coasting driving tion D. condition is indicated by a counter. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. The driving status Coast can be influenced with the shift paddles.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info" The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ Deactivating the system manually ometer approximately indicates idle speed. The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ The coasting point indicator is illuminated at ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to the zero point during coasting. use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill. Display in the instrument cluster with Settings are stored for the profile currently in extended range use. The mark in the efficiency dis‐ play below the tachometer is ECO PRO driving style analysis backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer The concept approximately indicates idle In this situation the system helps develop an speed. especially efficient driving style and to con‐ The coasting point indicator is illuminated at serve fuel. the zero point during coasting. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 178
Driving tips Saving fuel
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. Tips about the energy saving driving style, The range of the vehicle can be extended by Conserving fuel, refer to page 172. an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.
Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. Select the symbol.
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐ row 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving.
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 179
Saving fuel Driving tips
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 182
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Hints Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 184, prior to refueling. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀
Fuel lid Closing 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you Opening clearly hear a click. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler 2. Close the fuel filler flap. flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g. The release is located in the trunk.
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 183
Refueling Mobility
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To do this, turn the lid.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 184
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: This chapter describes all standard, country- US: ASTM 4806–xx specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to xx: comply with the current standard in each the selected options or country versions. This case. also applies to safety-related functions and Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐ systems. The respectively applicable country age of ethanol provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐ centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise Fuel recommendation this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀ Note Recommended fuel grade General fuel quality BMW recommends AKI 91. Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ Minimum fuel grade gine problems, for instance poor engine start- up behavior, poor handling and/or poor BMW recommends AKI 89. performance. Switch gas stations or use a Minimum fuel grade brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀ Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ Gasoline formance.◀ For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds tent. when starting at high outside temperatures. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ This has no effect on the engine life. taining metal must not be used. Fuel quality Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result out metallic additives. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ iron, as this can cause permanent damage to ronmental conditions such as high ambient the catalytic converter and other compo‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur. nents.◀ If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ommend switching to a high quality gasoline 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 185
Fuel Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 186
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours. series. It also describes features that are not The displays of inflation devices may under- necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire provisions must be observed when using the Monitor. respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure specifications Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 187, contains all tire inflation pressure sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and ▷ Road safety. recommended tire brands. This information ▷ Driving comfort. can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following: Check the tire inflation pressure regularly ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ Tire inflation pressures up to serve this precaution, you may be driving on 100 mph/160 km/h tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for that may not only compromise your vehicle's optimum driving comfort, note the pressure driving stability, but also lead to tire damage values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer and the risk of an accident.◀ to page 187, and adjust as necessary. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ flation pressure. Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 187
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - 89 Y RSC These pressure values can also be found on - 2.3 / 33 the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 255/35 R 19 door pillar. 92 Y RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 2.4 / 35 - Maximum permissible speed 90 Y XL RSC - 2.8 / 41 Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ Rear: 255/30 R 20 wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ 92 Y XL RSC
Tire inflation pressure values up to Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 428i, 428i xDrive 435i, 435i xDrive Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications Specifications in in bar/PSI bar/PSI with cold Specifications in tires bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - Specifications in 91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 bar/PSI with cold Rear: 255/40 R 18 tires 95 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 225/50 R 17 94 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 89 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 M+S A/S RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 225/50 R 17 94 H 92 Y RSC M+S RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 M+S A/S RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 225/45 R 18 91 Y 92 Y XL RSC RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 225/40 R 19 93 V M+S XL A/S RSC
Tire inflation pressures at max. Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 91 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for 89 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Rear: 255/35 R 19 relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ 92 Y RSC wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 90 Y XL RSC Tire inflation pressure values over - 3.1 / 45 100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC
428i, 428i xDrive Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Without high-speed tuning feature T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 189
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold tires tires
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 M+S RSC M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 RSC M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 225/45 R 18 91 Y M+S XL RSC RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC 91 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 255/40 R 18 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.9 /42 3.2 / 46 95 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 - 89 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 91 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/35 R 19 Rear: 255/40 R 18 92 Y RSC 95 Y RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 - 90 Y XL RSC - 3.1 / 45 89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/30 R 20 Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y XL RSC 92 Y RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 - T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h 90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 M 4.2 / 60 Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC
435i, 435i xDrive Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Without high-speed tuning feature T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 190
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires in bar/PSI Speed letter Specifications in Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h bar/PSI with cold tires R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 M+S RSC H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h 225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h 225/45 R 18 95 V Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h M+S XL RSC Tire Identification Number Front: 225/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 - DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 91 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Rear: 255/40 R 18 xxx: tire size and tire design 95 Y RSC 0115: tire age Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 - Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of 89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 the U.S. Department of Transportation. Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Tire age Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 - DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the 90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 1st week of 2015. Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Recommendation Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of least every 6 years. T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder Tire identification marks and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tire size Temperature A 245/45 R 18 96 Y DOT Quality Grades 245: nominal width in mm Treadwear 45: aspect ratio in % Traction AA A B C R: radial tire code Temperature A B C 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 191
Wheels and tires Mobility
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law. grades. Temperature grade for this tire Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and The treadwear grade is a comparative rating not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ in combination, can cause heat buildup and ernment test course. For example, a tire possible tire failure. graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of RSC – Run-flat tires their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 194, are labeled cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ with a circular symbol containing the letters ing habits, service practices and differences in RSC marked on the sidewall. road characteristics and climate. M+S Traction Winter and all-season tires with better cold The traction grades, from highest to lowest, weather performance than summer tires. are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under Tire tread controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Summer tires marked C may have poor traction performance. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than The traction grade assigned to this tire is 0.12 in/3 mm. based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if and does not include acceleration, cornering, the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Winter tires Temperature Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, 0.16 in/4 mm. and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are heat when tested under controlled conditions less suitable for winter operation. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 192
Mobility Wheels and tires
Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐ ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐ come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.◀ Wear indicators are distributed around the Repair of tire damage tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Tire damage Changing wheels and tires General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Mounting objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Information on mounting tires Hints Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles If work is not carried out properly, there is a can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and danger of subsequent damage and related suspension parts. This is more likely to occur safety hazards.◀ with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Wheel and tire combination careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your You can ask the service center about the right speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions with low-profile tires. for the vehicle. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair fects: the function of a variety of systems such as ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. ABS or DSC. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ dency to pull to the left or right. sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over figuration from a single manufacturer. curbs, road damage, or similar things. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 193
Wheels and tires Mobility
Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires You should only use wheels and tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., limit service life and have a negative impact on despite having the same official size ratings, road safety.◀ variations can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ Winter tires are recommended for operating on uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ winter roads. mine if they are suited for use, and therefore Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vide better winter traction than summer tires, vehicle.◀ they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ age and accidents can occur.◀ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the New tires case of a flat tire. Your service center will be Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ glad to advise you. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a Rotating wheels between axles break-in time. Different wear patterns can occur on the front Drive conservatively for the first and rear axles depending on individual driving 200 miles/300 km. conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service Retreaded tires center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ check the tire pressure and correct if needed. ommend the use of retreaded tires. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 194
Mobility Wheels and tires
Storage into the tires, which seals the damage from the Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with inside. as little exposure to light as possible. The compressor can be used to check the tire Always protect tires against all contact with oil, inflation pressure. grease and fuels. Hints Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. Run-flat tires ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. Label 1/8 in/4 mm or more. ▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the RSC label on the tire sidewall. electronics checked at the next opportu‐ The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ nity and have them replaced if needed. porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ Enclosed areas cial rims. Do not let the engine run in enclosed The support of the sidewall allows the tire to areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may remain drivable to a restricted degree in the lead to loss of consciousness and death. The event of a tire inflation pressure loss. exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire. Storage Changing run-flat tires The Mobility System is located under the For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No cargo floor panel. spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Mobility System
The concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 195
Wheels and tires Mobility
Sealing container Filling the tire with sealant 1. Shake the sealing container.
▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. 2. Take the connection hose completely out Observe use-by date on the sealant container. of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose. Compressor
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐ 1 On/off reel tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it engages audibly. 2 Holder for bottle 3 Reduce inflation pressure 4 Inflation pressure dial 5 Compressor 6 Connector/cable for socket 7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 196
Mobility Wheels and tires
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, reel on the compressor. ing that it engages audibly.
Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐ 5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire nutes valve of the defective wheel. Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀ Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at this point. 6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ reached: hicle. 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel. 3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. 4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center.
Stowing the Mobility System 1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐ ant container from the wheel. 2. Remove the connection hose from the sealant container.
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 197
Wheels and tires Mobility
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ 4. Insert the connector into a power socket nection hose in suitable material to avoid inside the vehicle. dirtying the cargo area. 4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ cle.
Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 12 mph/20 km/h. 2.5 bar. ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition To correct the tire inflation pressure turned on or the engine running, reel 1. Stop at a suitable location. on the compressor. 2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ valve stem. ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐ ble. 3. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor. Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center.
Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 225/50 R 17.
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 198
Mobility Wheels and tires
▷ 225/45 R 18. Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 199
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck 2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir 3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment. 5 Engine compartment fuse box
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 200
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood Indicator/warning lights When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control Hints message is displayed. Working in the engine compartment Closing the hood Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the Hood open when driving necessary professional technical training. If you see any signs that the hood is not If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed mediately and close it securely.◀ only by a service center. Danger of jamming If work is not carried out properly, there is a Make sure that the closing path of the danger of subsequent damage and related hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐ ment Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀
Fold down wiper arm Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 may result in damage.◀ in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
Opening the hood The hood must audibly engage on both sides. 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 201
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Requirements series. It also describes features that are not A current measured value is available after ap‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter the selected options or country versions. This trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip also applies to safety-related functions and is displayed. systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the With frequent short-distance trips, regularly respective features and systems. perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level General information On the Control Display: The engine oil consumption is dependent on 1. "Vehicle info" the driving style and driving conditions. 2. "Vehicle status" The engine oil consumption can increase in 3. "Engine oil level" case of, for example: ▷ Sporty driving. Engine oil level display messages ▷ Break-in the engine. Different messages appear on the display de‐ ▷ Idling of the engine. pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages. ▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level 125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to after refueling. page 202. The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Engine oil level too low measurement. Add engine oil immediately; otherwise, The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐ uring principles: sult in engine damage.◀ ▷ Status display Take care not to add too much engine oil. ▷ Detailed measurement Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately; Electronic oil measurement otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐ gine damage.◀ Status display
The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ play.
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 202
Mobility Engine oil
Detailed measurement Adding engine oil
The concept General information In the detailed measurement the engine oil Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ level is checked and displayed via a scale. cle before engine oil is added. Gasoline engine: If the engine oil level reaches the minimum Oil filler neck level, a check control message is displayed. Diesel engine: During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat.
General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines.
Requirements Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity ▷ Vehicle is on level road. to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral played in the instrument cluster. position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed. Adding engine oil ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ tor pedal not depressed. Do not add too much engine oil ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ perature. When too much engine oil is added, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, Performing a detailed measurement this may cause engine damage.◀ In order to perform a detailed measurement of Protect children the engine oil level: Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ 1. "Vehicle info" dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐ 2. "Vehicle status" ers to prevent health risks.◀ 3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" Engine oil types to add The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Hints Time: approx. 1 minute. No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 203
Engine oil Mobility
Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀ The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.
Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ ing oil rating standards: Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Further information regarding the oil specifica‐ tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐ quired with the service center.
Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Gasoline engine
API SM or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change: The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil.
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 204
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Symbol Meaning series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Maximum the selected options or country versions. This Minimum also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the Adding respective features and systems. 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess Hints pressure to dissipate, then open it. Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ Coolant consists of water and additives. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click. suitable additives are available from the service The arrows on the coolant reservoir and center. the lid must point towards one another. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible. Coolant level
General information Disposal Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ Comply with the relevant environmen‐ ant reservoir is located on the right side or the tal protection regulations when dispos‐ left side of the engine compartment. ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks.
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 205
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is This chapter describes all standard, country- continuously stored in the remote control. specific and optional features offered with the Your service center will read out this data and series. It also describes features that are not suggest the right array of service procedures necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to for your vehicle. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ systems. The respectively applicable country mote control with which the vehicle was driven provisions must be observed when using the most recently. respective features and systems. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a service center update the support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ time-dependent maintenance procedures, erational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ In some cases scopes and intervals may vary activated-charcoal filter. according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ Service and Warranty rately. Additional information is available from the service center. Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Condition Based Service Canadian models CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐ nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the Maintenance and repair should be performed amount of maintenance corresponding to your by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ user profile. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the Detailed information on service requirements, vehicle's Service and Warranty Information refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Con‐ Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty trol Display. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance.
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 206
Mobility Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions.
Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 207
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 70, the wiper arms. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and the selected options or country versions. This fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. Folding down wipers before opening the The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the hood right side in the trunk in a storage compart‐ Before opening the hood, ensure that the ment. Open the cover. wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.◀
Wiper blade replacement Lamp and bulb replacement Note Do not fold down the wipers without Hints wiper blades Lights and bulbs Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ have not been installed; this may damage the tion to vehicle safety. windshield.◀ The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar those or if they have not been described here.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 208
Mobility Replacing components
You can obtain a selection of replacement Headlight glass bulbs at the service center. Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ Danger of burns ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ Only change bulbs when they are cool; sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ otherwise, there is a danger of getting light glass does not need to be changed. burned.◀ If the headlights do not dim despite driving Working on the lighting system with the light switched on, increasing humidity When working on the lighting system, forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the you should always reel off the lights affected to service center check this. prevent short circuits. Headlight setting To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions The headlight adjustments can be affected by provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐ lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ Do not perform work/bulb replacement ice after a replacement. on xenon headlights Have any work on the xenon lighting system, Front lights, bulb replacement including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage Xenon headlights present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Xenon headlights Because of the long life of these bulbs, the Do not touch the bulbs likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with lights on and off frequently shortens their life. your bare hands, as even minute amounts of If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and contamination will burn into the bulb's surface continue the trip with great care. Comply with and reduce its service life. local regulations. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, Do not perform work/bulb replacement or hold the bulb by its base.◀ on xenon headlights Have any work on the xenon lighting system, Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) including bulb replacement, performed only by Some items of equipment use light-emitting a service center. Due to the high voltage diodes installed behind a cover as a light present in the system, there is a danger of fatal source. injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ These light-emitting diodes, which are related For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, to conventional lasers, are officially designated please contact your BMW center. as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 209
Replacing components Mobility
Headlights 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover.
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher 3 Turn signal 2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb Low beams and high beams are designed with socket counterclockwise and remove. xenon technology. The parking lights and daylight running lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Turn signal Follow general instructions, refer to page 207.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) With LED headlights, all front lights and side indicators are designed with LED technology. If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lights and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 210
Mobility Replacing components
Headlights Remove the bulb.
1 Cornering light 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector 2 Low beams/headlight flasher and screw on the wheel house panel. 3 High beams/headlight flasher Turn signal in exterior mirror 4 Parking lights / daytime running lights Follow general instructions, refer to page 207. 5 Turn signal The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature 6 Side marker lights LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Tail lights, bulb replacement Front fog lights At a glance Follow general instructions, refer to page 207. 35-watt bulb, H8. 1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1. Carefully pull back the wheel house panel, arrow 2.
1 Turn signal 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lights 5 Outside brake lamp
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights Turn the bulb, arrow 2. General information Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. Follow general instructions, refer to page 207. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ wise. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 211
Replacing components Mobility
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL. that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the The tail lights feature LED technology. Contact centering pin. your service center in the event of a malfunc‐ tion. Use caution when replacing the bulb Use caution and proceed one step at a time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ age to the tail lights or the vehicle.◀
Removing the exterior tail lamp
1. Open trunk lid. 6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐ 2. Loosen and remove the mounting pin of nector of the connecting line and remove the cover, arrow 1, with the screwdriver the connector from the bulb holder. from the onboard vehicle tool kit. Replacing the bulbs 1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
3. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit to press in the latch, arrow 2, and remove the cover, arrow 3. 4. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver handle, arrows. 2. Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ teners.
Installing the tail lamp 1. Connect the connecting line to the tail lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip. 5. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐ 2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing row 1, and carefully pull it backward and ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it not damaged. in place in order to prevent the tail lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make sure
211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 212
Mobility Replacing components
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of 3. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐ hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐ row 1 and the inner part onto the centering move the screws on the trim. component, arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
4. Press together hinge trim, see arrow, to re‐ lease the clips. 4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts. Grasp the trim, pull the hinge trim down‐ 5. Insert and secure the cover. Make sure that ward and remove it. the tubular seal is not pinched.
Lights in the trunk lid
General information Follow general instructions, refer to page 207. Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, PW16W. Inner brake lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W
Accessing the lights 5. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid, 1. If needed, remove warning triangle, refer to starting at the edge and working toward page 217, and bracket with the screw‐ the area around the recessed grips. Make driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, re‐ sure that the trim does not become stuck. fer to page 207. 6. Carefully swing out the trim. 2. Remove the emergency release and the wire cable from the handle.
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 213
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner 5. Install the wire cable on the handle and en‐ brake lamp gage the handle on the holder. 1. Loosen the bottom holder, arrow 1. 6. Install the holder for the warning triangle. 7. Apply the warning triangle.
Rear lamp, license plate lamp and central brake lamp Follow general instructions, refer to page 207. These lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
2. Loosen the top holder, arrow 2. To do so, press in the middle latch and then press Changing wheels out both outside latches. Remove the lamp holder, arrow 3. Hints 3. Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers‐ When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire ing or brake lamp from its socket counter‐ does not need to be changed immediately in clockwise. the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. 4. Insert the new bulb. Which is why no spare tire is available. The tools for changing wheels are available as Installing the bulb holder accessories from your service center. 1. Insert the two contacts, arrow 1, into the connections, arrow 2. Jacking points for the vehicle jack
2. Press on the bulb holder, arrow 3. Make The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ sure that the two exterior holders latch into cated at the positions shown. place. 3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and secure. Vehicle battery 4. Place the hinge trim over the hinge and push it up until the retaining pin engages. Maintenance Close the clips. The battery is maintenance-free.
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 214
Mobility Replacing components
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the Starting aid terminals service life of the battery. In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the Further information about the battery can be starting aid terminals, refer to page 218, in the obtained from your service center. engine compartment with the engine off.
Battery replacement Power failure Use approved vehicle batteries only After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ Only use vehicle batteries that have been tings updated, e. g.: approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ tions again. ble.◀ ▷ Time: update. After a battery replacement, have the battery ▷ Date: update. registered on the vehicle by the service center ▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize to ensure that all comfort features are fully the system, refer to page 48. available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort features are no longer Disposing of old batteries displayed. Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ Charging the battery cling center. General information Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ that it does not tip over during transport. ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: Fuses ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. Hints ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ Replacing fuses riods, longer than a month. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ Hints tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ Do not connect charging devices to the sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as types and locations are stored in the fuse box this may damage the vehicle battery due to an in the trunk. increased power consumption.◀
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 215
Replacing components Mobility
In the engine compartment In the trunk 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2. 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that all four fasteners are engaged. 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws.
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 216
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Hints This chapter describes all standard, country- Emergency Request not guaranteed specific and optional features offered with the For technical reasons, the Emergency series. It also describes features that are not Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to able conditions.◀ the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Overview systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional.
Intelligent Emergency Initiating an Emergency Request Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the The concept button lights up green. In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency quest can be made through this system. Request was initiated. If a cancel prompt appears on the display, General information the Emergency Request can be aborted. Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established.
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 217
Breakdown assistance Mobility
When the emergency request is received First aid kit at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes Note further steps to help you. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Even if you are unable to respond, the Check the expiration dates of the contents BMW Response Center can take further regularly and replace any expired items steps to help you under certain circum‐ promptly. stances. For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Storage Response Center which serve to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established. ▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request automatically The first aid kit is located in the trunk in a stor‐ age compartment. Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS Jump-starting button. General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be Warning triangle started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Hints Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀
The warning triangle is located on the inside of To prevent personal injury or damage to both the trunk lid. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. To remove, loosen the bracket.
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 218
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Preparation Connecting the cables Bodywork contact between vehicles 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid terminal. Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ tance. mation can be found on the battery. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ of the cable to the positive terminal of the cle. battery, or to the corresponding starting 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. consumers in both vehicles. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of Starting aid terminals the battery, or to the corresponding engine Connecting order or body ground of assisting vehicle. Connect the jumper cables in the correct 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀ negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ started in the usual way. gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ If the first starting attempt is not success‐ tive terminal. ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ charged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ verse order. Check the battery and recharge if needed.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 219
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Tow-starting and towing Tow truck
Note With rear-wheel drive Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀
Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position. Your vehicle should be transported with a tow Towing truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Follow the towing instructions Do not lift the vehicle Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; may result.◀ otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable. With xDrive ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering. ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ quired. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, The vehicle should only be transported on a it will not be possible to control the vehi‐ loading platform. cle's response. Do not tow with only the front or rear axle raised Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.◀
Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 220
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Steptronic transmission: transporting Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly your vehicle Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may Note cause damage.◀ Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ Therefore, contact a service center in the pending on local regulations. event of a breakdown. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly Do not have the vehicle towed identify the vehicle being towed by placing Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ dow. cur.◀ Tow bar Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.
The vehicle should only be transported on a Tow rope loading platform. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Do not lift the vehicle To avoid jerking and the associated stresses Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. may result.◀ Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ Tow fitting sitioning the vehicle. The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. Towing other vehicles The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. Hints Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse.◀
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 221
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 217. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐ alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐ gine is cold. 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations. The tow fitting is in the onboard vehicle tool kit 2. Ignition, refer to page 63, on. located in a storage compartment on the right 3. Engage third gear. side in the trunk. Open the cover. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release Tow fitting, information on use the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with ately press on the clutch pedal again. the vehicle and screw it all the way in. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved bar or rope, and switch off the hazard roads only. warning system. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., 6. Have the vehicle checked. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 222
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with high-pressure washers This chapter describes all standard, country- When using high-pressure washers, do not specific and optional features offered with the spray the sensors and camera lenses on the series. It also describes features that are not outside of the vehicle for long periods and necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Automatic car washes provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints Do not use high pressure washing sys‐ tems Car washes With washing systems operating at high pres‐ sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐ General information dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀ Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or the hood is raised. those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not age the vehicle. damaged by the transport mechanisms. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they Hints may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. Steam jets or high-pressure washers ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to When using steam jets or high-pressure page 69, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ washers, hold them a sufficient distance away vation. and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ refer to page 45. sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may Guide rails in car washes then lead to long-term damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails higher Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body washer.◀ could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 223
Care Mobility
Manual transmission: Headlights 1. Drive into the car wash. ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers. 2. Shift to neutral. ▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., 3. Switch the engine off. from insects, with shampoo and wash off 4. Switch on the ignition. with water. Steptronic transmission: ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an 1. Drive into the car wash. ice scraper. 2. Engage selector lever position N. After washing the vehicle 3. Switch the engine off. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes In this way, the ignition remains switched briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ can be reduced and corrosion of the brake played. discs can occur. Do not turn off the ignition in the car Completely remove all residues on the win‐ wash dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; smearing and to reduce wiper noises and otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ wiper blade wear. gaged and damages can result.◀ The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside Vehicle care when in selector lever position N. A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the Car care products vehicle. BMW recommends using care and cleaning To start the engine with manual transmission: products from BMW, since these have been 1. Press on the clutch pedal. tested and approved. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Car care and cleaning products To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ Follow the instructions on the container. sion: When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ 2. Press the Start/Stop button. cles. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ Cleansers can contain substances that are ping on the brake turns the ignition off. dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Selector lever position Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ Vehicle paint cally: Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in ▷ When the ignition is switched off. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences.
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 224
Mobility Care
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ turer's instructions. tered or discolored. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent Leather care components, such as the brake disk. Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Chrome surfaces Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased tor grille or door handles with an ample supply wear and premature degradation of the leather of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ surface. ularly when they have been exposed to road To guard against discoloration, such as from salt. clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Rubber components Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Aside from water, treat only with rubber cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially cleansers. more visible. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and silicon-containing car care products in order to grease will gradually break down the protective avoid damage or noises. layer of the leather surface. Fine wood parts Suitable care products are available from the service center. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a Upholstery material care soft cloth. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Plastic components If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage These include: stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using ▷ Roofliner. large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ▷ Lamp lenses. material vigorously. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Painted parts in the interior. other articles of clothing can damage the seat Clean with a microfiber cloth. covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ Dampen cloth lightly with water. Do not soak the roofliner. Caring for special components No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents Light-alloy wheels Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 225
Care Mobility
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead Displays/monitors to surface damage.◀ Cleaning displays and screens Do not use any chemical or household Safety belts cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐ Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and fected.◀ thus have a negative impact on safety. Keeping out moisture Chemical cleaning Keep all fluids and moisture away from Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the unit; otherwise, electrical components can the webbing.◀ be damaged.◀ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Avoid pressure Do not allow the reels to retract the safety Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning belts until they are dry. and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. No objects in the area around the pedals Long-term Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the When the vehicle is shut down for longer than function of the pedals could be impeded while three months, special measures must be driving and create the risk of an accident. taken. Additional information is available from the service center. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 228
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Note The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on informa‐ Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, from the service center. for example, due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority. measurement method. Detailed values can be
Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐ measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
BMW 4 Series Coupe
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.4/2,017
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.9/1,825
Height inches/mm 54.2–54.8/1,377– 1,392
Length inches/mm 182.6/4,639
Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1–38.7/11.3–11.8
Weights The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with Step‐ cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ tronic transmission.
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 229
Technical data Reference
428i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,340/4,385 kg 1,969/1,989
Load lbs 790 kg 358
Approved front axle load lbs 2,030 kg 921
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,435 kg 1,104
Approved roof load capacity lbs 165 kg 75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 15.7 Liters 445
435i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,475/4,510 kg 2,030/2,046
Load lbs 790 kg 358
Approved front axle load lbs 2,140 kg 971
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,470 kg 1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs 165 kg 75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 15.7 Liters 445
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 230
Reference Technical data
428i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,540 kg 2,059
Load lbs 790 kg 358
Approved front axle load lbs 2,160 kg 980
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,460 kg 1,116
Approved roof load capacity lbs 165 kg 75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 15.7 Liters 445
435i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,630/4,655 kg 2,100/2,111
Load lbs 790 kg 358
Approved front axle load lbs 2,270 kg 1,030
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,470 kg 1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs 165 kg 75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 15.7 Liters 445
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 231
Technical data Reference
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to page 184
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 232
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index A All around the steering Automatic transmission, see wheel 14 Steptronic transmission 71 ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-season tires, refer to Win‐ AUTO program, automatic cli‐ tem 118 ter tires 193 mate control 147 ACC, Active Cruise Control All-wheel-drive 119 AUTO program, climate con‐ with Stop & Go 123 Alternating-code hand-held trol 145 Acceleration Assistant, refer transmitter 152 AUTO program, intensity 147 to Launch Control 74 Alternative oil types 203 Auto Start/Stop function 65 Accessories and parts 7 Ambient light 95 Average fuel consumption 86 Activated-charcoal filter 149 Antifreeze, washer fluid 70 Average speed 86 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Antilock Brake System, Axle loads, weights 228 tion 115 ABS 118 Active Cruise Control with Anti-slip control, refer to B Stop & Go, ACC 123 DSC 118 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Approved axle load 228 Backrest curvature, refer to Brake force display 117 Approved engine oils, see Lumbar support 51 Adaptive Light Control 92 Suitable engine oil Backrest, width 51 Additives, oil 202 types 203 Band-aids, refer to First aid Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Arrival time 87 kit 217 straints 49 Ash tray 155 Bar for tow-starting/ After washing vehicle 223 Assistance when driving towing 220 Airbags 96 off 122 Battery replacement, vehicle Airbags, indicator/warning Assist system information, on battery 214 light 97 Control Display 89 Battery replacement, vehicle Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Attentiveness assistant 117 remote control 35 culated-air mode 145, 148 AUTO intensity 147 Battery, vehicle 213 Air, dehumidifying, refer to Automatic car wash 222 Belt carrier 54 Cooling function 145, 148 Automatic climate con‐ Belts, safety belts 53 Air distribution, trol 144 Beverage holder, cu‐ manual 145, 148 Automatic climate control pholder 161 Air flow, air conditioner 145 with enhanced features 146 Blinds, sun protection 47 Air flow, automatic climate Automatic Cruise Control BMW Assist, see user's control 148 with Stop & Go 123 manual for Navigation, En‐ Air pressure, tires 186 Automatic Curb Monitor 57 tertainment and Communi‐ Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Automatic deactivation, front- cation tion 149 seat passenger airbags 98 BMW Driver’s Guide App 6 Alarm system 44 Automatic headlight con‐ BMW Homepage 6 Alarm, unintentional 45 trol 92 BMW Internet page 6 All around the center con‐ Automatic locking 44 BMW maintenance sys‐ sole 16 Automatic recirculated-air tem 205 All around the roofliner 17 control 148 Bonus range, ECO PRO 174
232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 233
Everything from A to Z Reference
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Cargo, securing 170 Climate control 144, 146 pholders 161 Cargo straps, securing Clock 81 Brake assistant 118 cargo 170 Closing/opening via door Brake discs, break-in 166 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ lock 39 Brake force display 117 trol 34 Closing/opening with remote Brake lights, adaptive 117 Carpet, care 225 control 37 Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Car wash 222 Clothes hooks 161 play 117 Catalytic converter, refer to Coasting 176 Brake pads, break-in 166 Hot exhaust system 167 Coasting with engine decou‐ Braking, hints 167 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ pled, coasting 176 Breakdown assistance 216 ice 205 Coasting with idling en‐ Break-in 166 CD/Multimedia, see user's gine 176 Brightness of Control Dis‐ manual for Navigation, En‐ Cockpit 14 play 89 tertainment and Communi‐ Combination reel, refer to Bulb replacement 207 cation Turn signals 67 Bulb replacement, front 208 Center armrest 160 Combination switch, refer to Bulb replacement, LED head‐ Center console 16 Wiper system 68 lights 209 Central locking system 39 Comfort Access 41 Bulb replacement, rear 210 Central screen, refer to Con‐ COMFORT program, Dy‐ Bulb replacement, xenon trol Display 18 namic Driving Control 121 headlights 208 Changes, technical, refer to Compartments in the Bulbs and lights 207 Safety 7 doors 160 Button, RES 126 Changing parts 207 Compass 153 Button, Start/Stop 63 Changing wheels 213 Compressor 194 Bypassing, refer to Jump- Changing wheels/tires 192 Computer, refer to On-board starting 217 Chassis number, see vehicle computer 85 identification number 9 Condensation on win‐ C Check Control 77 dows 149 Checking the engine oil level Condensation under the vehi‐ California Proposition 65 electronically 201 cle 168 Warning 7 Checking the oil level elec‐ Condition Based Service Camera lenses, care 225 tronically 201 CBS 205 Camera, rearview cam‐ Children, seating position 59 Configuring driving pro‐ era 134 Children, transporting gram 122 Camera, Side View 137 safely 59 Confirmation signal 44 Camera, Top View 138 Child restraint fixing sys‐ ConnectedDrive, see user's Can holder, refer to Cuphold‐ tem 59 manual for Navigation, En‐ ers 161 Child restraint fixing system tertainment and Communi‐ Car battery 213 LATCH 61 cation Car care products 223 Child restraint fixing systems, ConnectedDrive Services Care, displays 225 mounting 59 Connecting electrical devi‐ Care, vehicle 223 Child seat, mounting 59 ces 155 Cargo 169 Child seats 59 Continued driving with a flat Cargo area, enlarging 157 Chrome parts, care 224 tire 101, 104 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Cigarette lighter 155 Control Display 18 ments 162 Cleaning displays 225 Control Display, settings 88
233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
Controller 18, 19 Dimmable interior rearview Dynamic Traction Control Control systems, driving sta‐ mirror 58 DTC 119 bility 118 Direction indicator, refer to Convenient opening with the Turn signals 67 E remote control 37 Display, electronic, instru‐ Coolant 204 ment cluster 76 ECO PRO 173 Coolant level 204 Display in windshield 89 ECO PRO, bonus range 174 Coolant temperature 81 Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO display 173 Cooling function 145, 148 strument lighting 94 ECO PRO driving mode 173 Cooling, maximum 147 Displays, cleaning 225 ECO PRO driving style analy‐ Cooling system 204 Disposal, coolant 204 sis 177 Cornering light 92 Disposal, vehicle battery 214 ECO PRO mode 173 Corrosion on brake discs 168 Distance control, refer to ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ Cosmetic mirror 155 PDC 131 struction 175 Courtesy lamps during un‐ Distance to destination 86 EfficientDynamics 176 locking 37 Divided screen view, split Electronic displays, instru‐ Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ screen 23 ment cluster 76 cle locked 38 Door lock 39 Electronic oil measure‐ Cruise control 129 Door lock, refer to Remote ment 201 Cruise control, active with control 34 Electronic Stability Program Stop & Go 123 Drive-off assistant 122 ESP, refer to DSC 118 Cruising range 81 Drive-off assistant, refer to Emergency detection, remote Cupholders 161 DSC 118 control 35 Current fuel consumption 82 Driver assistance, refer to In‐ Emergency release, fuel filler telligent Safety 105 flap 182 D Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ Emergency Request 216 telligent Safety 105 Emergency start function, en‐ Damage, tires 192 Driving Dynamics Con‐ gine start 35 Damping control, dy‐ trol 120 Emergency unlocking, trans‐ namic 120 Driving instructions, break- mission lock 74 Data, technical 228 in 166 Emergency unlocking, trunk Date 81 Driving mode 120 lid 41 Daytime running lights 92 Driving notes, general 166 Energy Control 82 Defrosting, refer to defrosting Driving stability control sys‐ Energy recovery 82 the windows 145 tems 118 Engine, automatic Start/Stop Defrosting, refer to Windows, Driving style analysis 177 function 65 defrosting 149 Driving tips 166 Engine, automatic switch- Defrosting the windows 145 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ off 65 Dehumidifying, air 145, 148 trol 118 Engine compartment 199 Deleting personal data 25 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine compartment, work‐ Deletion of personal data 25 trol 119 ing in 200 Destination distance 86 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine coolant 204 Digital clock 81 trol 120 Engine idling when driving, Digital compass 153 Dynamic Stability Control coasting 176 Dimensions 228 DSC 118 Engine oil 201 Dimmable exterior mirrors 57 Engine oil, adding 202
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 235
Everything from A to Z Reference
Engine oil additives 202 Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ G Engine oil change 203 ting 220 Engine oil filler neck 202 Flat tire, changing Garage door opener, refer to Engine oil temperature 80 wheels 213 Universal Integrated Remote Engine oil types, alterna‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM 103 Control 151 tive 203 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gasoline 184 Engine oil types, ap‐ tor TPM 99 Gear change, Steptronic proved 203 Flat tire, warning transmission 72 Engine start during malfunc‐ lamp 100, 103 Gear shift indicator 83 tion 35 Flooding 167 General driving notes 166 Engine start, jump-start‐ Floor carpet, care 225 Glare shield 155 ing 217 Floor mats, care 225 Glass sunroof, powered 47 Engine start, refer to Starting Fogged up windows 145 Glove compartment 159 the engine 64 Fold down the rear seat back‐ Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Engine stop 64 rest, see Though-loading proved 228 Engine temperature 80 system 157 Entering a car wash 222 Fold-out position, wiper 70 H Equipment, interior 151 Foot brake 167 Error displays, see Check Front airbags 96 Handbrake, refer to parking Control 77 Front-end collision warning brake 67 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ with braking function 108 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ gram, refer to DSC 118 Front-end collision warning nating code 152 Exchanging wheels/tires 192 with City Braking func‐ Hazard warning flashers 216 Exhaust system 167 tion 106 Head airbags 96 Exterior mirror, automatic Front fog lights 94 Headlight control, auto‐ dimming feature 57 Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ matic 92 Exterior mirrors 56 placement 210 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ External start 217 Front lights 208 ture 92 External temperature dis‐ front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight flasher 68 play 81 automatic deactivation 98 Headlight glass 208 External temperature warn‐ Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlights 208 ing 81 indicator lamp 98 Headlights, care 223 Eyes for securing cargo 170 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 103 Headlight washer system 68 Fuel 184 Head restraints 49 F Fuel consumption, current 82 Head restraints, front 54 Fuel consumption, refer to Head-up Display 89 Failure message, see Check Average fuel consump‐ Head-up Display, care 225 Control 77 tion 86 Heavy cargo, stowing 170 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel filler flap 182 Height, vehicle 228 tional alarm 45 Fuel gauge 80 High-beam Assistant 93 Fan, refer to Air Fuel lid 182 High beams 68 flow 145, 148 Fuel quality 184 High beams/low beams, refer Filler neck for engine oil 202 Fuel recommendation 184 to High-beam Assistant 93 Fine wood, care 224 Fuel, tank capacity 231 Hills 168 First aid kit 217 Fuse 214 Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 122
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 236
Reference Everything from A to Z
Hints 6 Instrument cluster, electronic Knee airbag 97 Holder for beverages 161 displays 76 Homepage 6 Instrument lighting 94 L Hood 200 Integrated key 34 Horn 14 Integrated Owner's Manual in Lamp replacement 207 Hotel function, trunk lid 41 the vehicle 30 Lamp replacement, front 208 Hot exhaust system 167 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lamp replacement, rear 210 HUD Head-up Display 89 quest 216 Lane departure warning 113 Hydroplaning 167 Intelligent Safety 105 Lane margin, warning 113 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Language on Control Dis‐ I gram 147 play 89 Interior equipment 151 Lashing eyes, securing Ice warning, see External Interior lights 94 cargo 170 temperature warning 81 Interior lights during unlock‐ LATCH child restraint sys‐ Icy roads, see External tem‐ ing 37 tem 61 perature warning 81 Interior lights with the vehicle Launch Control 74 Identification marks, tires 190 locked 38 Leather, care 224 Identification number, see ve‐ Interior motion sensor 45 LED light, bulb replace‐ hicle identification num‐ Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ ment 209 ber 9 matic dimming feature 58 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ iDrive 18 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ odes 208 Ignition key, refer to Remote pass 153 Length, vehicle 228 control 34 Interior rearview mirror, man‐ Letters and numbers, enter‐ Ignition off 63 ually dimmable 58 ing 25 Ignition on 63 Internet page 6 Light alloy wheels, care 224 Indication of a flat Interval display, service re‐ Light control 92 tire 100, 103 quirements 82 Light-emitting diodes, Indicator and alarm lamps, Interval mode 69 LEDs 208 see Check Control 77 Lighter 155 Indicator lamp, see Check J Lighting 91 Control 77 Lights 91 Individual air distribu‐ Jacking points for the vehicle Lights and bulbs 207 tion 145, 148 jack 213 Light switch 91 Individual settings, refer to Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Load 170 Personal Profile 35 sion 72 Loading 169 Inflation pressure, tires 186 Jump-starting 217 Lock, door 39 Inflation pressure warning Locking/unlocking via door FTM, tires 103 K lock 39 Info display, refer to On- Locking/unlocking with re‐ Board computer 85 Key/remote control 34 mote control 37 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Locking, automatic 44 tor TPM 100 Access 41 Locking, settings 43 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Key Memory, refer to Per‐ Locking via trunk lid 40 FTM 103 sonal Profile 35 Low beams 91 Instrument cluster 76 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Low beams, automatic, refer mission 71 to High-beam Assistant 93
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 237
Everything from A to Z Reference
Lower back support 51 Measure, units of 89 Obstacle marking, rearview Luggage rack, see Roof- Medical kit 217 camera 135 mounted luggage rack 171 Memory, seat, mirror 55 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ Lumbar support 51 Menu, EfficientDynamics 176 ommended fuel grade 184 Menu in instrument clus‐ Odometer 81 M ter 85 Office, see user's manual for Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Navigation, Entertainment Maintenance 205 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ and Communication Maintenance require‐ ing concept 20 Oil 201 ments 205 Messages, see Check Con‐ Oil, adding 202 Maintenance, service require‐ trol 77 Oil additives 202 ments 82 Microfilter 146, 149 Oil change 203 Maintenance system, Minimum tread, tires 192 Oil change interval, service BMW 205 Mirror 56 requirements 82 Make-up mirror 155 Mirror memory 55 Oil filler neck 202 Malfunction displays, see Mobile communication devi‐ Oil types, alternative 203 Check Control 77 ces in the vehicle 167 Oil types, approved 203 Manual air distribu‐ Mobility System 194 Old batteries, disposal 214 tion 145, 148 Modifications, technical, refer On-board computer 85 Manual air flow 145, 148 to Safety 7 Onboard monitor, refer to Manual mode, Steptronic Moisture in headlight 208 Control Display 18 transmission 72 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Onboard vehicle tool kit 207 Manual operation, door play 18 Opening/closing via door lock 39 Mounting of child restraint lock 39 Manual operation, exterior systems 59 Opening and closing 34 mirrors 57 Multifunction steering wheel, Opening and closing, without Manual operation, fuel filler buttons 14 remote control 39 flap 182 Opening and closing, with re‐ Manual operation, Park Dis‐ N mote control 37 tance Control PDC 132 Opening the trunk lid with no- Manual operation, rearview Navigation, see user's manual touch activation 42 camera 135 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Operating concept, iDrive 18 Manual operation, Side ment and Communication Optional equipment, standard View 137 Neck restraints, front, refer to equipment 6 Manual operation, Top Head restraints 54 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ View 138 Neutral cleaner, see wheel matic recirculated-air con‐ Manual transmission 71 cleaner 224 trol 148 Marking on approved New wheels and tires 192 Overheating of engine, refer tires 193 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ to Coolant temperature 81 Marking, run-flat tires 194 towing 220 Master key, refer to Remote P control 34 O Maximum cooling 147 Paint, vehicle 223 Maximum speed, display 84 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 206 Parallel parking assistant 139 Maximum speed, winter OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Park Distance Control tires 193 agnosis 206 PDC 131
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 238
Reference Everything from A to Z
Parked-car ventilation 150 R Retaining straps, securing Parked vehicle, condensa‐ cargo 170 tion 168 Radiator fluid 204 Retreaded tires 193 Parking aid, refer to PDC 131 Radio-operated key, refer to Roadside parking lights 92 Parking assistant 139 Remote control 34 Roller sunblinds 47 Parking brake 67 Radio ready state 63 RON recommended fuel Parking lights 91 Radio, see user's manual for grade 184 Parts and accessories 7 Navigation, Entertainment Roofliner 17 Passenger side mirror, tilting and Communication Roof load lidacity 228 downward 57 Rain sensor 69 Roof-mounted luggage Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Rear lights 213 rack 171 era 135 Rear socket 156 Rope for tow-starting/ PDC Park Distance Con‐ Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ towing 220 trol 131 ment 210 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Pedestrian warning with city Rearview camera 134 ponent, refer to Run-flat braking function 111 Rearview mirror 56 tires 194 Personal Profile 35 Rear window de‐ Rubber components, Personal Profile, exporting froster 145, 148 care 224 profiles 36 Recirculated-air filter 149 Run-flat tires 194 Personal Profile, importing Recirculated-air profiles 37 mode 145, 148 S Pinch protection system, Recommended fuel glass sunroof 48 grade 184 Safe braking 167 Pinch protection system, win‐ Recommended tire Safety 7 dows 46 brands 193 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Plastic, care 224 Refueling 182 er's seat and front passen‐ Power failure 214 Remaining range 81 ger seat 54 Power sunroof, glass 47 Remote control/key 34 Safety belts 53 Power windows 46 Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety belts, care 225 Pressure, tire air pres‐ tion 38 Safety systems, airbags 96 sure 186 Remote control, univer‐ Saving fuel 172 Pressure warning FTM, sal 151 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ tires 103 Replacement fuse 214 play 18 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Replacing parts 207 Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ file 35 Replacing wheels/tires 192 hicle tool kit 207 Programmable memory but‐ Reporting safety defects 9 Screw thread, see screw tons, iDrive 24 RES button 126 thread for tow fitting, screw Protective function, glass RES button, see Active thread for tow fitting 221 sunroof 48 Cruise Control, ACC 123 Sealant 194 Protective function, win‐ RES button, see Cruise con‐ Seat and mirror memory 55 dows 46 trol 129 Seat belts, refer to Safety Push-and-turn switch, refer to Reserve warning, refer to belts 53 Controller 18, 19 Range 81 Seat heating, front 52 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Seating position for chil‐ TPM 100 dren 59 Seats 49
238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 239
Everything from A to Z Reference
Selection list in instrument Speed warning 87 Switch-on times, parked-car cluster 85 Split screen 23 ventilation 150 Selector lever, Steptronic SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 transmission 72 Driving Control 121 Symbols 6 Sensors, care 225 Sport displays, torque dis‐ Symbols in the status field 23 Service and warranty 8 play, performance dis‐ Service requirements, Condi‐ play 87 T tion Based Service SPORT program, Dynamic CBS 205 Driving Control 121 Tachometer 80 Service requirements, dis‐ Sport program, transmis‐ Tail lights 210 play 82 sion 72 Technical changes, refer to Services, ConnectedDrive Sport steering, variable 120 Safety 7 Servotronic 122 Stability control systems 118 Technical data 228 SET button, see Active Start/stop, automatic func‐ Telephone, see user's manual Cruise Control, ACC 123 tion 65 for Navigation, Entertain‐ SET button, see Cruise con‐ Start/Stop button 63 ment and Communication trol 129 Start function during malfunc‐ Temperature, automatic cli‐ Settings, locking/unlock‐ tion 35 mate control 145, 147 ing 43 Starting the engine 64 Temperature display for ex‐ Settings on Control Dis‐ Status control display, ternal temperature 81 play 88 tires 100 Temperature, engine oil 80 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Status information, iDrive 23 Tempomat, refer to Active ror 55 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Cruise Control 123 Shift paddles on the steering Steering assistance 122 Terminal, starting aid 218 wheel 73 Steering wheel, adjusting 58 Text message, supplemen‐ Side airbags 96 Steering wheel heating 58 tary 80 Side View 136 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Theft alarm system, refer to Signaling, horn 14 sion, refer to Steptronic Alarm system 44 Signals when unlocking 44 transmission 71 Thigh support 51 Sitting safely 49 Steptronic transmission 71 Through-loading system 157 Size 228 Stopping the engine 64 Tilt alarm sensor 45 Slide/tilt glass roof 47 Storage compartment in the Time of arrival 87 Smallest turning radius 228 rear 161 Tire damage 192 Snow chains 197 Storage compartments 159 Tire identification marks 190 Socket 155 Storage compartments, loca‐ Tire inflation pressure 186 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ tions 159 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ nostics 206 Storage, tires 194 tor, refer to FTM 103 SOS button 216 Storing the vehicle 225 Tire Pressure Monitor Spare fuse 214 Suitable engine oils 203 TPM 99 Specified engine oil Summer tires, tread 191 Tires, changing 192 types 203 Sun visor 155 Tire sealant 194 Speed, average 86 Supplementary text mes‐ Tires, everything on wheels Speed limit detection, on- sage 80 and tires 186 board computer 87 Surround View 134 Tires, run-flat tires 194 Speed limiter, display 84 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ Tire tread 191 Speed Limit Information 84 ing 120
239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 240
Reference Everything from A to Z
Tone, see user's manual for U Warning displays, see Check Navigation, Entertainment Control 77 and Communication Unintentional alarm 45 Warning messages, see Tool 207 Units of measure 89 Check Control 77 Top View 137 Universal remote control 151 Warning triangle 217 Total vehicle weight 228 Unlock button, Steptronic Warranty 7 Touchpad 21 transmission 72 Washer fluid 70 Tow fitting 220 Unlocking/locking via door Washer nozzles, wind‐ Towing 219 lock 39 shield 70 Tow lug, see Tow fitting 220 Unlocking/locking with re‐ Washer system 68 Tow-starting 219 mote control 37 Washing, vehicle 222 Tow truck 219 Unlocking, settings 43 Water on roads 167 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Updates made after the edito‐ Weights 228 tor 99 rial deadline 7 Welcome lamps during un‐ Traction control 119 Upholstery care 224 locking 37 TRACTION, driving dynam‐ USB interface 156 Welcome lights 91 ics 119 Wheel base, vehicle 228 Transmission lock, electronic V Wheel cleaner 224 unlocking 74 Wheels, changing 192 Transmission, manual trans‐ Vanity mirror 155 Wheels, everything on wheels mission 71 Variable sport steering 120 and tires 186 Transmission, Steptronic Vehicle battery 213 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor transmission 71 Vehicle battery, replac‐ FTM 103 Transporting children ing 214 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ safely 59 Vehicle, break-in 166 tor TPM 99 Tread, tires 191 Vehicle care 223 Width, vehicle 228 Trip computer 87 Vehicle features and op‐ Window defroster, Triple turn signal activa‐ tions 6 rear 145, 148 tion 68 Vehicle identification num‐ Windows, powered 46 Trip odometer 81 ber 9 Windshield washer fluid 70 Truck for tow-starting/ Vehicle jack 213 Windshield washer noz‐ towing 219 Vehicle paint 223 zles 70 Trunk lid closing 40 Vehicle storage 225 Windshield washer sys‐ Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle wash 222 tem 68 ing 41 Ventilation 149 Windshield wiper 68 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Ventilation, refer to Parked- Winter storage, care 225 Trunk lid opening 40 car ventilation 150 Winter tires, suitable Trunk lid, opening with no- VIN, see vehicle identification tires 193 touch activation 42 number 9 Winter tires, tread 191 Trunk lid via remote con‐ Voice activation system 27 Wiper 68 trol 38 Wiper blades, replacing 207 Turning circle 228 W Wiper fluid 70 Turning circle lines, rearview Wiper, fold-out position 70 camera 135 Warning and indicator lamps, Wiper system 68 Turn signals, operation 67 see Check Control 77 Wood, care 224
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15 Seite 241
Everything from A to Z Reference
Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 25 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 207 X
xDrive 119 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐ placement 208
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15
More about BMW
The Ultimate bmwusa.com Driving Machine® 01 40 2 960 520 ue
*BL296052000W*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 520 - II/15